• Skip to primary navigation
  • Skip to main content
  • Skip to primary sidebar

Fantabulosity logo

  • All Recipes
  • Vintage Recipes
  • Holiday
  • Dinner Theme System
  • About
  • Navigation Menu: Social Icons

    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
menu icon
go to homepage
subscribe
search icon
Homepage link
  • All Recipes
  • Theme Night Dinner System
  • Dinner
  • Desserts
  • Holidays
  • Contact
  • About Jessica
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • Twitter
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs

    January 12, 2025

    Chili cheese stuffed corn dogs on a platter.

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs are one of those comfort meals that hit the spot when you want to keep things easy. Three ingredients and just a few minutes are all you need.

    Chili cheese corn dogs recipe on baking sheet.

    Comfort food is delicious all year long and not just in the fall and winter months, and when it’s an easy comfort food recipe, well that makes things even better.

    Whether you’re buying everything pre-made like frozen corn dogs and canned chili for this recipe, or if you’re looking for more of a recipe, you can adjust it a bit and make your own mini corn dogs and use this easy chili recipe. Either way, this recipe is considered easy and great for beginners.

    Why You’ll Love Chili Cheese Stuffed Corn Dogs

    • Family-friendly: Adults and kids love this recipe, so even with some picky eaters it’s a winner at home.
    • Quick meal: Ready in about 30 minutes, this makes a great busy night dinner.
    • Pantry meal: Even though the frozen corn dogs are kept in the freezer, I still consider this a “pantry meal” because you can keep the ingredients on hand for those last-minute needs.

    Key Ingredients

    Ingredients in packaging for making chili cheese corn dogs.

    See the full list of ingredients and amounts in the recipe card below.


    • Frozen corn dogs – Regular size is best but you can also do mini-corn dogs if that’s what you have on hand. Or, you can make Wiener Winks to pour chili on top.
    • Canned chili – Use your favorite chili, whether that’s a homemade recipe, canned chili that’s spicy, without beans, without meat, etc.
    • Shredded cheddar cheese – Using pre-shredded cheese is quick and easy. However, if you have time, shredding your own block cheese melts better and tastes even better.
    • Optional toppings: onion, bacon, jalapeno, are just a few ideas that you can top your chili cheese corn dogs with.

    How to Make Chili Cheese Corn Dogs

    Frozen corn dogs on a baking sheet.
    Cooked corn dogs on a baking sheet.
    1. Bake corn dogs according to package directions.
    2. Carefully remove the wooden stick from the cooked corn dogs.
    Corn dogs sliced open ready for filling.
    Chili added to middle of corn dogs just before cheese is added.
    1. Slice each corn dog vertically down the center, about halfway through, being careful not to cut through the bottom.
    2. Into the cut, add chili, and cheese.
    Shredded cheese added to chili corn dogs.
    Baked chili cheese corn dogs on a baking sheet.
    1. Place back in the oven and cook for another 5 minutes or until the cheese has melted. Serve warm!

    Recipe Tips

    • When splitting the corn dogs open, make sure the centers aren’t frozen anymore, even though you’ll be warming them again with the chili and cheese.
    • If you find that your corn dogs are overcooked before adding the chili and cheese, you can cover them with aluminum foil to prevent them from burning more.

    Storing Tips

    Storing leftovers: Although the chili cheese corn dogs can be stored for later, this could result in a soggy corn dog. It’s best to assemble the chili cheese corn dogs right before eating. So storing the ingredients separately is recommended.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can you make chili cheese corn dogs in the air fryer?

    You can but it can get messy, since air is blowing around, and it could cause the shredded cheese to blow around, and the chili and cheese to get all over the air fryer basket. Making chili cheese corn dogs in the oven is my recommendation and for a super fast cook time, the microwave is the best option, although it will sacrifice texture.

    What is chili and cheese good on?

    Chili and cheese are delicious on corn dogs, oven-baked hot dogs, beef and cheese burritos, cheeseburger recipes, and a simple nacho recipe.

    What goes well with corn dogs?

    French fries, tater tots, and chips are classic side dishes for corn dogs. However, pasta salad recipes and fun savory dips like this taco layer dip pair wonderfully with them.

    Baked chili cheese stuffed corn dogs on a platter.

    Related Recipes

    • Fritos, chili, cheese, onions, all piled together in cardboard dish.
      Frito Chili Pie
    • White chicken chili in white bowl
      White Chicken Chili with Cream Cheese
    • Instant Pot Chili Mac
    • Chilis Southwestern Egg Rolls Copycat
      Chilis Southwestern Egg Rolls Copycat & Sauce

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chili cheese corn dogs on a baking sheet.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs

    Chili Cheese Corn Dogs are as simple as using frozen corn dogs, canned or homemade chili, and sprinkling with cheese, all cooked together, making it a family-favorite meal.
    Course Dinner, Lunch, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 corn dogs
    Calories 239kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 6 frozen corn dogs
    • 15 ounces canned chili or 2 cups; try my homemade chili recipe
    • 1 cup shredded cheddar cheese
    • Optional toppings: onion, bacon, jalapeno, optional

    Instructions

    • Bake corndogs according to package the directions, with your preferred cooking method. I prefer oven-baked on a baking sheet, covered with parchment paper.
    • Carefully remove the wooden stick from the cooked corn dogs by sliding the stick out.
    • With a knife, slice each corn dog vertically down the center, about halfway through, being careful not to cut through to the bottom.
    • Pour about a ¼ cup of chili (or deisred amount) in to each cut corn dog, and sprinkle with shredded cheese.
    • Place back in oven (or preferred cooking method) and cook at the same temperature that was used to cook the corn dogs, and cook for another 5 minutes or until the cheese has melted. Serve warm!

    Video

    Notes

    Tip: When splitting the corn dogs open, make sure the centers aren’t frozen anymore, even though you’ll be warming them again with the chili and cheese. Bake them a little longer if needed before adding the chili and cheese to melt.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1corn dog | Calories: 239kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 153mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 278IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 163mg | Iron: 2mg

    Homemade Chicken Broth

    January 11, 2025

    Homemade Chicken Broth is easy to make, so rich in flavor to use in soups, pasta recipes or to sip on when you’re not feeling well. In about 2 hours, you’ll have chicken stock ready to use.

    Homemade chicken broth in a mason jar.

    This recipe uses a whole, uncooked chicken but if you have a rotisserie chicken on hand, did you know you can make chicken broth out of a rotisserie chicken too? It’s true, and it’s a great way to not let the bones go to waste.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Boiling a whole chicken is a great way to cook chicken for a lot of different recipes but it can also create a delicious chicken broth in the process.
    • Homemade chicken broth can have a rich flavor that storebought may not have.
    • This recipe uses simple ingredients to create a fresh flavor, and it’s also a great way to use up any vegetables or herbs you may have left from other recipes.

    Ingredients

    Ingredients for homemade chicken broth.

    You can see the full list of ingredients and amounts in the recipe card below but I’ve included notes about some of the key ingredients here:

    • Whole chicken: Sizes of the chicken will vary, so just make sure your pot is big enough to hold the chicken and enough water to cover it.
    • Dried thyme: If you decide to use fresh thyme, this will be about 3-4 sprigs.
    • Dried rosemary: If using fresh rosemary instead, only one sprig of fresh rosemary is needed.
    • Black peppercorns: Don’t feel the need to go out and buy peppercorns just for this recipe, especially if you don’t have a grinder to use the rest in other recipes. Ground black pepper will work as well.
    • Onion: Yellow or white onions are best for making chicken broth.

    How to Make Homemade Chicken Broth

    Chicken broth ingredients in large pot before cooking.
    Step 1: Add chicken, and all other ingredients to the stock pot.
    Cooked chicken broth ingredients in pot.
    Step 2: Bring to a boil and simmer for 1-1.5 hours.
    Ladle scooping chicken broth in to mixing bowl.
    Step 3: Strain vegetables and herbs to separate broth.
    Clear chicken broth in mixing bowl with ladle.
    Step 4: Store broth for later use or use in your favorite dishes right away.

    FAQs

    Is chicken broth just boiled chicken water?

    Basically yes, however, adding herbs and vegetables to the chicken and water can give the broth more flavor.

    What is the difference between chicken stock and chicken broth?

    Chicken broth is made from boiling chicken meat, vegetables, and seasonings. Chicken stock is made by boiling just the bones.

    Can you put raw chicken in boiling broth?

    It’s best to place the raw chicken in the stock pot and then add the water and begin to boil.

    Homemade chicken broth in mason jars sitting next to stock pot.

    How to Store Chicken Broth

    To store: Let cool to room temperature, and transfer to airtight containers or jars. It can be stored in the fridge for up to five days.

    To freeze: This also freezes beautifully, for up to three months! Be sure to use a freezer-safe container if you choose to do this method!

    To thaw: Place the container in the fridge overnight and reheat as needed.

    Recipes to Use With Chicken Broth

    Now that you have your homemade broth made, here are a few favorite recipes that you can use it in:

    • Homemade chicken noodle soup.
      The Best Chicken Noodle Soup Recipe – Quick and Easy
    • Homemade Chicken Pot Pie in white pie dish, with a peek at the veggies and chicken.
      Easy Chicken Pot Pie Recipe
    • buffalo chicken soup in white bowl with green onions and chips
      Buffalo Chicken Soup Recipe
    • Bowl of ham and beans with spoon, and cornbread sitting on side of bowl.
      Ham and Beans Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Homemade Chicken Broth

    This homemade chicken broth recipe is ready to use in about 2 hours and comes together using simple ingreidents to give this broth a rich flavor.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 3 quarts
    Calories 62kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 whole raw chicken
    • 2 quarts water
    • 1 tablespoon dried thyme
    • 1 tablespoon dried rosemary
    • 1 tablespoon black peppercorns
    • 2 tablespoons sea salt
    • 2 bay leaves
    • 4 cloves garlic
    • 3-4 carrots
    • 3-4 celery stalks
    • 1 onion
    • 1 handful fresh parsley

    Instructions

    • In a large stock pot, place whole chicken in the bottom. Combine thyme, rosemary,peppercorns, salt, bay leaves, garlic, carrots, onion, celery, and parsley. Pour water over top until ingredients are covered. 3-4 quarts.
    • Bring to a boil over high heat, and when boiling, reduce to a simmer and cook for about an hour, to an hour and a half or until chicken is done, and vegetables are soft.
    • Once it has finished cooking, remove veggies and chicken with a slotted spoon. (don’t throw that beautiful chicken away! Shred and store for later use!
    • Strain the liquid through a mesh strainer, you can line with cheesecloth, but I don’t mind a few little herbs in my stock. You can add more salt if needed.
    • If not using right away, let the stock cool to room temperature, and transfer to airtight containers or jars, and place in the refrigerator.

    Notes

    • This broth can be stored in the fridge for up to five days.
    • This also freezes beautifully, for up to three months! Be sure to use a freezer-safe container if you choose to do this method!
    • To thaw, place the container in the fridge overnight and reheat as needed.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cup | Calories: 62kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 0.3mg | Sodium: 4733mg | Potassium: 346mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 10416IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 110mg | Iron: 3mg

    Twix Cookies

    January 11, 2025

    Stack of Twix cookies on white marble counter.

    Twix Cookies, a combo of a buttery shortbread base, gooey caramel, and smooth chocolate. These chocolate caramel cookies have the taste of Twix candy bars, in cookie form.

    Twix cookies with chocolate and caramel topping, stacked on top of one another.

    If you are left with the urge to make more easy recipes with chocolate, you could try my No Bake Chocolate Pie for those times when you don’t want to turn on the oven.  Or for another delicious dessert, make some Chocolate Peanut Butter Brownies that combine two of the best flavors in one recipe!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Perfect for all occasions: Whether it’s a holiday, birthday party, or just a casual gathering, these Twix bar Cookies will be the talk of the event, appealing to both children and adults alike.
    • Customizable to taste: If you’re feeling creative, this recipe can easily be adapted with different types of chocolate or add-ins like nuts and sea salt for a personalized touch to this perfect treat.
    • Kid-friendly kitchen activity: Making Twix Cookies can be a fun and educational experience for children, allowing them to help with dipping in chocolate and layering the ingredients, all while learning basic baking skills.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients with text, for Twix cookies recipe.
    • Powdered Sugar – Also known as confectioners’ sugar, this fine sugar is essential for creating a smooth and spreadable frosting. For best results, sift the powdered sugar before using it to prevent lumps and ensure a silky texture on your Twix Cookies.
    • Caramels – Quality matters when it comes to the caramel layer. Choose a premium brand of caramels for melting. For a foolproof melt and rich flavor, consider using soft caramels from a confectioner’s shop.
    • Milk Chocolate Chips – For the classic Twix taste, use high-quality milk chocolate chips. Ghirardelli chocolate chips melt beautifully and provide a luxuriant, creamy finish that complements the caramel and shortbread layers perfectly.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions are necessary because of ingredients that are unavailable or needed for dietary restrictions. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Caramels – If you are unable to find soft caramels, you can opt for a homemade caramel sauce or even dulce de leche as a rich and creamy alternative.
    • Cream – In recipes that require cream, such as for a caramel layer, coconut cream can be a lactose-free substitute that adds a subtle tropical flavor. For those not averse to dairy but out of cream, condensed milk can sometimes serve as a suitable alternative, especially in sweet recipes.
    • Milk Chocolate Chips – For a less sweet or dairy-free option, dark chocolate chips can be used. For a vegan alternative, look for dairy-free chocolate chips made with a cocoa butter base. If you want a more intense chocolate flavor, try using semi-sweet chocolate chips instead.

    Variations

    • White Chocolate Dream: Swap the milk chocolate for white chocolate chips for a sweeter, creamier taste. This version is especially delightful for white chocolate enthusiasts.
    • Nutty Crunch: Mix in some finely chopped pecans or almonds into the caramel layer before setting, adding texture and a nutty flavor to your delicious cookie.
    • Sea Salt Sprinkle: Enhance the flavors by lightly sprinkling sea salt over the chocolate layer before it sets, offering a savory contrast to the sweet caramel and chocolate.
    • Cookie Butter Base: Experiment with cookie butter spread as a base layer for a twist that brings a spiced, gingerbread-like dimension to the flavor profile.

    How to Make Twix Cookies

    STEP 1: Prepare Baking Sheets – Line two baking sheets with parchment paper to prevent cookies from sticking.

    STEP 2: Mix Dry Ingredients – In a large bowl, combine flour, sugar, and salt by whisking them together.

    STEP 3: Incorporate Wet Ingredients – Melt butter and add it to the bowl along with the vanilla. Use a spatula to mix the ingredients until they’re just combined, then use your hands to form a dough ball.

    STEP 4: Chill Dough – Flatten the dough into a disk, cover it in plastic wrap, and refrigerate between 1 hour and overnight to firm up.

    STEP 5: Rest Dough – Before rolling, let the dough rest at room temperature for 15 minutes to 1 hour, depending on how long it was chilled.

    STEP 6: Preheat Oven – Around 10 minutes before you’re ready to roll out the dough, set the oven to preheat at 350 degrees Fahrenheit.

    STEP 7: Roll and Cut Dough – On a floured surface, gently roll the dough to a thickness between ¼ and ½ inch, then use a round cookie cutter to form circles. Place the cut cookies on the prepared sheets, spacing them about 1 inch apart. Re-roll and cut any remaining dough.

    Baked shortbread cookies on a baking sheet, ready for Twix topping.

    STEP 8: Bake Cookies – Bake for 12-14 minutes until the edges are firm and the bottoms of the cookies have a light golden hue. Allow them to cool on the baking sheet for a few minutes before transferring them to a cooling wire rack.

    STEP 9: Melt Caramels – Place caramels in a medium bowl with cream or milk and melt in the microwave oven, stirring halfway through the heating process until smooth and fully melted.

    STEP 10: Add Caramel to Cookies – Dollop a tablespoon of the melted creamy caramel onto the top of each cookie, spreading it close to the edges, and then chill the cookies to set the layer of caramel.

    STEP 11: Melt Chocolate – Put chocolate chips and oil in a microwave-safe bowl and heat in short bursts, stirring regularly to avoid overheating until fully melted.

    Image collage of how to make Twix Cookies.

    STEP 12: Layer Chocolate – Spoon or scoop the melted chocolate onto the caramel-covered cookies, spreading it nearly to the caramel’s edges with a swirling motion.

    STEP 13: Set Chocolate – Allow the chocolate to harden on the cookies for a short time in the fridge or at room temperature, then they are ready to enjoy!

    Twix cookies ready to eat, sitting on white plate, with chocolate and caramel topping.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Evenly Rolled Dough: For uniform cookies, use rolling pin guides or a pair of chopsticks on either side of the dough when rolling it out.
    • Precise Caramel Layer: To achieve a neat caramel layer, use a silicone mold or an ice cube tray sprayed with cooking spray as a template. Pour the caramel into the mold, then freeze for easy placement on your cookies.
    • Smooth Chocolate Topping: For a glossy chocolate finish, consider tempering the chocolate if you’re experienced with the technique, or else ensure your chocolate isn’t too hot when you pour it over the caramel for that smooth shiny surface.
    • Cookie Craftsmanship: If your chocolate sets too quickly, warm the knife in hot water before slicing for cleaner cuts without cracking the chocolate layer.
    • Cream Over Milk: I strongly suggest using cream instead of milk for the caramel. The cream creates a thicker and more stable caramel layer. When milk is used, the caramel may spread slightly after being at room temperature. However, milk can still be used if necessary.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use gluten-free flour instead of all-purpose flour for the cookies?

    Yes, you can use a gluten-free flour blend designated for baking, but keep in mind that the texture and taste of your cookies may vary slightly from the original recipe.

    What can I substitute for vanilla extract in the cookie dough?

    If you don’t have vanilla extract, you can try almond extract for a different flavor profile or omit it altogether. The buttery flavor of the shortbread will still shine through.

    Is there a way to prevent the caramel from becoming too hard?

    The key is to watch the caramel closely as it melts with the cream or milk. Overcooking can cause it to harden too much once cooled. Additionally, adding a bit more cream or milk can help keep the caramel layer soft.

    Can I use a stovetop method to melt the chocolate and caramel instead of a microwave?

    Absolutely! You can melt both the caramel and chocolate in a double boiler on the stove, just be sure to stir continuously to prevent burning and to achieve a smooth texture.

    My cookies came out too crumbly, what did I do wrong?

    Crumbly cookies can result from various factors, including measuring the flour incorrectly, overmixing the dough, or not allowing the dough to chill sufficiently. Make sure to measure your ingredients carefully and follow the steps for chilling and resting the dough.

    How do I ensure my cookies are all the same size?

    Use a cookie cutter or the rim of a glass to ensure consistent shapes and sizes. For even thickness, use a rolling pin with adjustable rings or place guides such as wooden dowels on each side of the dough when rolling out.

    What to Serve with Twix Cookies

    Twix cookies are a delightful treat on their own, but they also pair beautifully with a variety of beverages and snacks. Serve them alongside a steaming mug of hot cocoa or a cold glass of milk to complement their rich, buttery flavors. 

    If serving at a gathering, consider a dessert platter with fresh fruit and an assortment of cheeses, which will offer a pleasant counterbalance to the caramel and chocolate notes of the cookies.

    Storage

    To keep your Twix cookies tasting fresh, place them in an airtight container and store at room temperature for up to 5 days. For longer storage, you can refrigerate them for up to 2 weeks. 

    To freeze: These cookies are also freezer-friendly—layer them between sheets of parchment paper in a freezer-safe container, and they can be stored for up to 3 months. 

    To thaw: Simply thaw them at room temperature or give them a brief stint in the microwave for a warm, gooey treat.

    More Cookie Recipes You’ll Love

    In the mood for more cookies? You could try making these Rocky Road Cookies that are packed with flavor but still simple to make.  Or try some of my Easy Chocolate Turtle Cookies Recipe if you are still craving chocolate and caramel!

    Or, for some of my other favorite easy desserts, give one of these a try:

    • Slice of Pina Colada sheet cake on a plate.
      Pina Colada Cake
    • Slice of pink lemonade cake, with pink and white striped straw sticking out the top.
      Pink Lemonade Cake
    • Slice of peaches and cream cake on plate with fresh peaches on top.
      Peaches and Cream Cake
    • A serving of banana dump cake in a small ramekin with caramel sauce and sliced bananas.
      Banana Dump Cake

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Stack of Twix cookies on white marble counter.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Twix Cookies

    Twix Cookies: An easy cookie recipe made with a thumbprint to trap in all of that gooey caramel center and sweet chocolate drizzle.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 40 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 32 cookies
    Calories 235kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 cups all-purpose flour spooned into measuring cup and leveled
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 ¼ cup unsalted butter melted
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 packages of 11-ounce caramels
    • 2 tablespoons cream or milk
    • 2 cups milk chocolate chips
    • 2 teaspoons vegetable oil

    Instructions

    • Line two baking sheets with parchment paper.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together flour, sugar and salt.
    • Add melted butter and vanilla and combine ingredients together with a spatula, just until incorporated and combined. Using your hands, form the dough into a ball.
    • Flatten dough into a disk, cover with plastic wrap, and chill dough for 1 hour to overnight. The dough can be rolled out without refrigeration but will stay together best with a little chilling.
    • Take the dough disc out of the fridge and let rest for 15 minutes- 1 hour depending on the length of refrigeration. The dough needs to be slightly soft to be able to roll out.
    • 10 minutes before rolling out, preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
    • On a floured surface, gently roll dough ¼ to ½ inch thick. Using a 2 ½ inch round cookie cutter, cut dough into circles and place on prepared baking sheets about 1 inch apart. Combine leftover dough and roll out and cut again until all the dough is used.
    • Bake cookies for 12-14 minutes until the edges are set and the bottom of the cookies are lightly golden. Let cool on cookie sheets for 2-3 minutes and transfer to a cooling rack to cool.
    • Unwrap caramels and place them in a medium-sized microwaveable bowl. Add cream or milk. Microwave for 45 seconds. Remove the bowl from the microwave and stir with a wooden spoon. Reheat in the microwave for an additional 30-45 seconds and stir until caramel is completely melted, slightly reheating again in the microwave if necessary.
    • Using a tablespoon or 1-inch cookie scoop, drop approximately 1 tablespoon of caramel onto the center of a cookie. Using the back of a spoon sprayed with cooking spray, spread the caramel to almost the edge of the cookie. Place the cookie on a clean cookie sheet and repeat with all the cookies. Place cookies in the fridge for approximately 15-30 minutes for the caramel to set.
    • Pour chocolate chips into a microwaveable bowl. Add oil. Microwave for 30 seconds, then stir with a spatula. Repeat in 15-second intervals, stirring between each one, until chocolate is completely melted. Do not microwave for too long or the chocolate will overheat and seize.
    • Using a spoon or a 1-inch cookie scoop, place ¾ tablespoon of chocolate on the center of the cookie over the caramel. Spread the chocolate with a spoon, knife, or offset icing spatula to almost the edges of the caramel, swirling as you go.
    • Allow the chocolate to set, for a few minutes in the fridge or at room temperature, and enjoy!

    Notes

    • Evenly Rolled Dough: For uniform cookies, use rolling pin guides or a pair of chopsticks on either side of the dough when rolling it out.
    • Precise Caramel Layer: To achieve a neat caramel layer, use a silicone mold or an ice cube tray sprayed with cooking spray as a template. Pour the caramel into the mold, then freeze for easy placement on your cookies.
    • Smooth Chocolate Topping: For a glossy chocolate finish, consider tempering the chocolate if you’re experienced with the technique, or else ensure your chocolate isn’t too hot when you pour it over the caramel for that smooth shiny surface.
    • Cookie Craftsmanship: If your chocolate sets too quickly, warm the knife in hot water before slicing for cleaner cuts without cracking the chocolate layer.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 235kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 124mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 355IU | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 0.8mg

    Biscoff Fudge

    January 8, 2025

    The center of the photo is a stack of 3 pieces of fudge with additional pieces scattered around the stack

    Biscoff Fudge: Creamy layers of cookie butter-infused fudge, white chocolate fudge, and crunchy cookie pieces make this easy no-bake dessert absolutely irresistible! Much like our No Bake Biscoff Pie, which looks beautiful sitting next to this fudge on your holiday dessert table.

    A close up photo of pieces of fudge stacked up in the foreground with a jar of cookie butter in the background

    If you need a simple no-bake dessert that is a crowd-pleaser than look no further than fudge! These easy fudge recipes are the perfect treat for your sweet tooth: decadent Cookie Dough Fudge or our classic Peanut Butter fudge!

    Why You’ll Love This Fudge Recipe

    This delicious fudge is made with a handful of ingredients. No, literally – there are only 5 ingredients! Better yet, you can find all of them at your local grocery store!

    If you are a Biscoff lover, then this fudge recipe will make your day. There is Biscoff cookie butter and Biscoff crumbs (if you have extra crumbs, consider making a Biscoff crust for later or even making this Biscoff cupcake recipe to sprinkle the crumbs on top!) stirred inside the fudge and there are even more Biscoff cookies crumbled on top!

    Fudge transports easily so it makes a natural dessert choice for a potluck or party and a great gift for the foodies in your life.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    You’ll make this Biscoff fudge with white chocolate, Biscoff cookies (or speculoos biscuits), and a few more pantry ingredients. That’s it!

    Bowls of white chocolate chips, crushed Biscoff cookies and sweetened condensed milk and a jar of cookie butter are displayed on a white marble background
    Ingredients
    • White chocolate chips – I love the Ghiradelli brand but you can use your favorite.
    • Vanilla extract – pure vanilla extract is recommended over imitation, although it will work if that’s what you have.
    • Biscoff cookie butter spread – usually found in the grocery store by the peanut butter.
    • Biscoff cookies (or “Lotus”) – usually found in the grocery store, along with other cookies.

    See the printable recipe card below for the full list of ingredients, instructions, and detailed notes for this creamy Biscoff fudge.

    How to Make Biscoff Fudge

    You will love how easy this fudge recipe is! The step-by-step instructions below will give you a gorgeously layered, addictively flavored fudgy dessert in no time!

    1. First, line an 8×8 baking dish with parchment paper or wax paper and set it aside.
    2. Then, in a large microwave-proof bowl, combine the sweetened condensed milk and vanilla extract and microwave for 30 seconds until the mixture is hot but not bubbling.
    3. Add the white chocolate chips to the hot milk mixture and let the sit for about 30 seconds before stirring to allow them to melt. You can microwave it for an additional seconds if needed to melt the chips completely. Stir until all of the chips are melted and the mixture is smooth and creamy. *Remove 1 ½ cups of the white chocolate fudge mixture and set it aside.
    A glass mixing bowl containing sweetened condensed milk and vanilla extract is centered on a white marble background
    Heat milk and vanilla
    White chocolate chips have been added to a glass mixing bowl containing sweetened condensed milk and vanilla extract
    Add white chocolate chips
    1. Now, add the Lotus cookie butter and fine Biscoff crumbs into the large bowl of warm white chocolate mixture.
    A scoop of cookie butter has been added to a creamy white chocolate mixture in a large glass mixing bowl
    Stir in cookie butter
    Biscoff cookie pieces have been added to a glass mixing bowl with a cookie butter white chocolate mixture
    Add cookie crumbs
    1. Stir the biscoff fudge mixture until the cookie spread and cookie crumbs are incorporated. Work quickly as the fudge will start to thicken fast.
    2. Pour the cookie butter mixture into the prepared dish and spread it evenly in the bottom of the pan.
    A large glass mixing bowl contains a caramel colored mixture studded with cookie pieces
    Mix well
    Caramel colored fudge studded with cookie pieces has been spread in a parchment paper lined 8x8 white baking dish
    Spread in an 8×8 pan
    1. Then, pour or spread the reserved white chocolate mixure over the biscoff layer.
    2. Sprinkle the large Biscoff biscuit pieces over the top of the white chocolate fudge layer. Place the dish in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to all the fudge to cool and set.
    A layer of melted white chocolate has been spread on top of fudge in a square white baking dish
    Add the white chocolate layer
    Biscoff cookies pieces and cookie crumbs top a pan of fudge
    Top with cookie pieces
    1. Finally, remove the fudge from the refrigerator and cut it into about 30 squares. Serve the cookie butter fudge chilled or at room temperature
    A pan of white chocolate cookie topped fudge has been cut into squares. A jar of cookie butter and speculoos cookies are in the top of the photo as well

    Have no fear. Those small pieces of fudge pack BIG Biscoff flavor!

    Substitutions & Variations

    We’re sharing a few ways you can easily adjust this recipe below:

    • Vanilla extract pairs well with the Biscoff cookies, but you can use almond extract for a hint of slightly nutty flavor.
    • We used white chocolate chips, but you can also make this fudge with milk chocolate chips. The flavor will change slightly, but I bet it will still be utterly delicious. Can you ever go wrong with cookies and chocolate?
    • If you can’t find the Lotus brand of Biscoff spread, Trader Joe’s cookie butter is a perfect substitute.

    FAQs

    Don’t be surprised if this is the first time you’ve heard of Biscoff cookies or Biscoff spread. However, once you buy them, I’m fairly certain it won’t be your last!

    • What is the flavour of Biscoff? Biscoff cookies (or Lotus Biscoff biscuits or speculoos cookies) are a crispy buttery cookie with the warm flavors of brown sugar, cinnamon and ginger.
    • What is Biscoff made of? Like most cookies, there are basic ingredients like flour, sugar, oil and a leavening (rising) agent. Then, to give that warm spicy flavor, cinnamon is added. There are no nuts in Biscoff cookies.
    • What is Biscoff spread used for? This spread has the consistency of peanut butter but it tastes like spreadable cookies! You can put Lotus Biscoff spread on toast or English muffins, use it to make this fudge (of course!), heat it up and drizzle it on ice cream, blend it with cream cheese to slather on bagels, use it to dip fruit in or just eat it by the spoonful. (We won’t tell.)
    A close up photo of pieces of fudge that allows the layers of fudge, white chocolate and cookie pieces

    Storage

    This Biscoff fudge can be stored in an air-tight container in your refrigerator for up to 7 days.

    You can also store this creamy fudge in a freezer-safe container for up to 6 months in your freezer. You never have to go fudge-less again!

    A close up photo a stack of pieces of fudge, surrounded by more fudge squares, a jar of cookie butter and a few more speculoos cookies

    Related Recipes

    Biscoff fans, this Biscoff Cheesecake is absolutely scrumptious and these Biscoff truffles are equally as good! And if you’re a sucker for a recipe that celebrates cookies, try the BEST Oreo dessert! Finally, if you need another no bake dessert that is delicious any time of year, No Bake Peanut Butter Bars should do it!

    What Biscoff desserts should we make next? Biscoff brownies? Biscoff cupcakes? Let me know!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    The center of the photo is a stack of 3 pieces of fudge with additional pieces scattered around the stack
    Print Pin
    5 from 6 votes

    Biscoff Fudge

    Biscoff Fudge: Creamy layers of cookie butter infused fudge, white chocolate fudge and crunchy cookie pieces make this easy no-bake dessert absolutely irresistible!
    Course Dessert, Snack
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Chilling Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 30 squares
    Calories 167kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 14 ounces sweetened condensed milk
    • 3 cups white chocolate chips
    • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • ½ cup Biscoff cookie butter
    • 12 Biscoff cookies crushed into fine crumbs
    • 6 Biscoff cookies crumbled into pieces

    Instructions

    • Line an 8×8 baking dish with parchment paper and set aside.
    • In a large microwave-safe bowl, combine the sweetened condensed milk and vanilla extract and microwave in 30-second intervals until the mixture is hot, but not bubbling.
    • Quickly add the white chocolate chips to the hot milk mixture and let them sit for about 30 seconds before stirring to allow the white chocolate chips to melt. You can microwave it for an additional 30 seconds if needed to melt the chips completely. Stir until all chips are melted and the mixture is smooth. Remove 1 ½ cups of the white chocolate chip mixture and set it aside.
    • Now, add the cookie butter and fine Biscoff crumbs into the large bowl of warm white chocolate mixture.
    • Stir the biscoff fudge mixture until the cookie spread and cookie crumbs are incorporated. (Work quickly as the fudge will start to thicken fast.)
    • Pour the cookie butter mixture into the prepared dish and evenly pour or spread it in the bottom of the pan. Then, pour or spread the remaining white chocolate mixture that you set aside over the biscoff layer.
    • Sprinkle the large Biscoff biscuit pieces over the top of the white chocolate fudge layer. Place the dish in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes to all the fudge to cool and set.
    • Remove the fudge from the refrigerator and cut it into about 30 squares. Serve this easy fudge chilled or at room temperature.

    Notes

    • This Biscoff fudge can be stored in an airtight container in your refrigerator for up to 7 days or in a freezer-safe container for up to 6  months in the freezer.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1square | Calories: 167kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 33mg | Potassium: 101mg | Fiber: 0.04g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 41IU | Vitamin C: 0.4mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Croissant Bread Pudding

    January 6, 2025

    A serving of bread pudding sits on a white plate garnished with fresh berrries and vanilla sauce

    Croissant Bread Pudding is a simple, decadent dessert made with creamy custard, flaky croissants, and a warm homemade vanilla sauce!

    A close up photo of a piece of bread pudding garnished with whipped cream, fresh berries and a drizzle of creamy vanilla sauce
    Croissant bread pudding

    Bread pudding is a pretty big deal around here. You may remember this original recipe for bread pudding. We’ve even made Donut Bread Pudding, Chocolate bread pudding, and Banana Bread Pudding. But now, buckle up for this version made with buttery croissants and a thick glorious vanilla sauce!

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    I think bread pudding might be my favorite dessert. Since the ingredients are easy to keep stocked in your kitchen, this is a good recipe for unexpected entertaining.

    Bread pudding is a great way to use stale bread and stale croissants (or any stale types of bread or buns) so it doesn’t get thrown away.

    This is one of those recipes that uses basic ingredients and no special tools or techniques. Oh, but when it is served, the scents of toasty baked croissants, cinnamon and vanilla will really wow your family and guests!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    You can pick up all the simple ingredients for this croissant bread pudding recipe at your local grocery store. In fact, I bet that you have most of them in your pantry and kitchen right now!

    Croissants, eggs, butter, milk, sugar, vanilla and cinnamon are displayed on a white marble background
    Ingredients

    How to Make Croissant Bread Pudding

    You can find the entire list of ingredients in the recipe card below. I’ve provided a few helpful notes about some of the key ingredients, below:

    • Large croissants – Cut into cubes (about 12 cups of croissant pieces)
    • Whole milk – 2%, skim, heavy cream, or half and half can also be used
    • Sugar – White, granulated sugar
    • Vanilla extract – pure vanilla is recommended, although imitation can be used if needed.

    For the Warm Vanilla Sauce

    • Whole milk – Whole is recommended for the right consistency but other types will work if needed.
    • Sugar – white granulated sugar

    Instructions

    1. Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F.
    2. Prepare a 19×13 baking dish with non-stick cooking spray. Spread out the croissant cubes evenly in the dish. Set aside.
    3. Whisk the whole eggs in a large mixing bowl. Then, add the milk, sugar, vanilla extract, and spices and whisk until the sugar dissolves and the custard mixture is well combined.
    A 9x13 baking dish is filled with cubes of croissant
    Add croissant cubes
    A mixing bowl contains and egg and cream mixture with spices added, ready to be whisked
    Whisk the custard together
    1. Pour the custard mixture evenly over the croissant cubes. Use a spatula to gently toss the croissant pieces to ensure that they are all coated with the custard.
    A close up photo of a cinnamon egg and cream mixture being poured over a baking dish of cubed croissants
    Pour the custard over
    1. Let the bread pudding rest on the counter for 15 minutes so the custard is absorbed into the croissant pieces. Gently toss the bread mixture pudding again and let it rest for 15 more minutes.
    2. Bake for 50 minutes until the custard sets and the croissants are puffy and golden brown. Allow the bread pudding to cool slightly as you make the vanilla sauce.
    A spatula tosses cubed croissants in a rich egg and cream mixture in a white 9x13 baking dish
    Toss the croissant cubes
    A white 9x13 baking dish of baked croissant bread pudding is surrounded by fresh berries
    Bake until golden

    How to Make the Vanilla Sauce

    1. Cut the butter into 4 pieces to help it melt easier.
    2. Then, to a small saucepan over medium heat, add the butter, milk, sugar and vanilla extract. Stir occasionally until the butter has melted.
    3. Next, add one tablespoon of cornstarch and a pinch of salt. Remove the sauce from the heat and whisk until the cornstarch is dissolved and the sauce is smooth and glossy. If you prefer a thicker sauce, add up to one additional tablespoon of cornstarch, whisking to combine.
    The ingredients for a thick glossy vanilla sauce are combined in a small metal sauce pan
    Vanilla sauce ingredients
    A wooden spoon stirs a thick glossy vanilla sauce in a small metal sauce pan
    Stir or whisk until smooth
    1. Serve the bread pudding and drizzle the vanilla sauce over the top of the bread pudding. To make this simple dessert a special treat, garnish each serving with whipped cream and berries!
    Plates of bread pudding garnished with fresh berries, a small pitcher of vanilla sauce, a bowl of berries and forks are included in a welcoming breakfast spread
    Croissant Bread Pudding Slice

    Substitutions

    Croissant bread pudding with sauce is a simple but impressive dessert. We have a few suggestions so you can make this recipe right now with what you might have on hand.

    • Stale croissants or day-old croissants really soak up the creamy custard, but if you don’t have time, fresh croissants will still result in a delicious bread pudding.
    • For an even creamier custard, use a combination of whole milk, heavy cream or half and half.

    Variations

    We’ve got some fun ways to really take this bread pudding recipe over the top!

    • We used traditional butter croissants for this croissant bread and butter pudding, but you can use chocolate croissants or almond croissants.
    • While we topped the bread pudding with fruit, you can bake fresh berries right into the bread pudding! Toss one cup of fresh fruit in with the croissant cubes before baking.
    • Instead of vanilla sauce, serve this dessert bread pudding with maple syrup, a berry compote, caramel or chocolate sauce.
    • Sprinkle a few tablespoons of chocolate chips or pecan pieces to add texture and flavor to this dessert.
    • We love to garnish this warm pudding with fresh fruit or fresh berries like blueberries, blackberries and strawberries. Some other fruit options are sliced peaches, sliced bananas and even warmed fruit jam.
    • To really impress your family and guests, serve this dessert bread pudding with vanilla ice cream, too!

    How to Store Croissant Bread Pudding

    Keep leftovers stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    A serving of croissant bread pudding sits on a white plate garnished with vanilla sauce, whipped cream and fresh berries

    FAQs

    Does croissant bread pudding need to be refrigerated after baking?

    Since bread pudding is a pretty moist baked good and it contains dairy, we recommend refrigerating any leftovers.

    Can you eat bread and butter pudding cold?

    Sure! Since the custard mixture containing eggs and dairy is cooked thoroughly, it is safe to eat cold.

    How do you reheat croissant bread pudding?

    To reheat single servings of the bread pudding, microwave for one minute. If you need to reheat a larger portion, warm it in the oven, covered in aluminum foil, at 350 degrees F for 10-15 minutes or until warmed through.

    Related Recipes

    • Texas Toast Pizza on baking sheet
      Texas Toast Pizzas
    • Sliced banana bread on white platter
      Best Banana Bread
    • Chicken Alfredo garlic bread slices.
      Chicken Alfredo Garlic Bread
    • Cookies and Cream Cinnamon Rolls
      Oreo Cinnamon Rolls

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    A serving of bread pudding sits on a white plate garnished with fresh berrries and vanilla sauce
    Print Pin
    5 from 5 votes

    Croissant Bread Pudding

    Croissant Bread Pudding is a simple, delicious dessert made with creamy custard, flaky croissants and a warm homemade vanilla sauce!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 630kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    For the bread pudding

    • 7-9 croissants cubed (about 12 cups)
    • 5 large eggs
    • 3 cups whole milk
    • 1 cup granulated sugar
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
    • 2 teaspoons ground cinnamon `
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    To make the vanilla sauce

    • ½ cup unsalted butter
    • ¾ cup whole milk
    • ½ cup granulated sugar
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1-2 tablespoons cornstarch
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt

    Instructions

    To make the croissant bread pudding

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
    • Prepare a 9×13 baking dish with non-stick cooking spray. Spread out the croissant cubes evenly in the dish. Set aside.
    • Whisk the whole eggs in a large mixing bowl. Then, add the milk, sugar, vanilla extract and spices and whisk until the sugar dissolves and the custard mixture is well combined.
    • Pour the custard mixture evenly over the croissant cubes. Use a spatula to gently toss the croisssant pieces to make sure they are all coated with the custard.
    • Let the bread pudding rest on the counter for 15 minutes so the custard is absorbed into the croissant pieces. Gently toss the croissants and let it rest for 15 more minutes.
    • Bake for 50 minutes until the custard sets and the croissants are puffy and golden brown. Allow the bread pudding to cool slightly as you make the vanilla sauce.

    To prepare the vanilla sauce

    • Cut the butter into 4 pieces.
    • Then, to a small saucepan over medium heat, add the butter, milk, sugar and vanilla extract. Stir occasionally until the butter has melted.
    • Next, add one tablespoon of cornstarch and a pinch of salt. Remove the sauce from the heat and whisk until the cornstarch is dissolved and the sauce is smooth and glossy. If you prefer a thicker sauce, add up to one additional tablespoon of cornstarch, whisking to combine.
    • Serve the bread pudding with a drizzle of vanilla sauce. For a special treat, garnish each serving with whipped cream and fresh berries.

    Notes

    • I recommend chopping the croissants into cubes and letting them dry overnight. Stale croissants will result in the best texture for the bread pudding.
    • The 30 minute resting period (and the toss half-way through) helps all of the croissant pieces soak up the custard, so the resulting bread pudding is moist without being soggy.
    • For a creamier custard, use a combination of whole milk, heavy cream or half and half.
    • Keep leftovers stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 630kcal | Carbohydrates: 74g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 203mg | Sodium: 518mg | Potassium: 300mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 51g | Vitamin A: 1187IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 191mg | Iron: 2mg

    Loaded Baked Potato Soup Recipe

    January 5, 2025

    Loaded Potato Soup in small crock, next to fabric napkin.

    Loaded Baked Potato Soup: This easy soup recipe is comforting on a cool night and quick enough for a busy weeknight dinner.

    Easy Loaded Potato Soup Recipe Photo

    So… the grocery store had a sale on russet potatoes. With my bargain shopping and money-saving strategies I’ve been implementing lately, I totally took advantage of this deal. “Buy one 5 lb bag of potatoes for $2.99, get one free.” Say What!? Do you know how many meals/side dishes I can make with 2-5 lb bags of potatoes? This, my friend, is how this potato soup was born.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Soup Recipe

    • Simple ingredients – Even though this soup has tons of flavor, the ingredients are easy to find and you may even have most of them on hand.
    • Quick – This soup is ready in under 30 minutes so it’s a great option for a busy weeknight.
    • Large batch – Whether you’re feeding a crowd or making a recipe that you want to freeze for later, this potato soup is a crowd-pleaser and freezes great.

    Ingredients

    You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below but here are a few notes about key ingredients:

    • Potatoes – I use russet potatoes but you can also use red or yellow potatoes if that’s what you have on hand.
    • Chicken broth – You can use storebought or make your own homemade chicken broth or even broth out of a rotisserie chicken.
    • Bacon bits – Real, cooked bacon bit pieces can purchased but you can also make your own bacon and chop it in to fine pieces. I love cooking bacon in the air fryer for this recipe since it’s quick.
    • Ranch seasoning – The seasoning that comes in packets to make ranch dressing is recommended here. However, if you only have ranch dressing, that can work too. I’d start by adding ¼ cup of ranch dressing and adding more if desired.
    • Sour cream – Don’t buy sour cream just for this recipe since it uses such a little amount. Try using cream cheese instead.
    • Heavy cream – As with the sour cream, don’t buy a container of heavy cream just for this recipe. You can simply add a little more milk, or even a little butter if desired to help add depth to this soup.

    How to Make Loaded Potato Soup

    Just a few steps are required before letting this soup simmer on the stove to let the flavors come together.

    Cube the Potatoes:

    Easy Loaded Potato Soup Recipe Photo

    When you make potato soup, do you cut the potatoes up in to small chunks like this? Or do you leave them fairly large or mash them completely? I’ve had so many different versions of potato soup, and I can honestly say that I don’t really care how the texture of the soup is. But for this batch, I decided to cut them up in to about ½ in.-1 in. cubes.

    • Boil potatoes in water, in a large stock pot until tender.
    • Drain potatoes and return to pot.
    • Add in remaining ingredients, and let simmer for at least 10-15 minutes to let cook through.

    Tip: You can also boil potatoes in chicken broth instead of water for more flavor but reserve ½ chicken broth for the soup.

    Easy Loaded Potato Soup Recipe Photo

    FAQs

    What is loaded potato soup made of?

    Baking potatoes, cheese, bacon, sour cream, spices, milk and heavy cream come together to create a creamy, flavorful, comforting soup.

    How do you thicken loaded baked potato soup?

    Making a roux for a soup can thicken it. You can do this by mixing together 1 tablespoon of flour and 1 tablespoon of cold water, then whisk it in to the soup and allow it to heat through and thicken until desired consistency. Tip: Adding a tablespoon of soup to the roux before adding it to the pot of soup can help make sure there aren’t clumps.

    Do you have to peel potatoes for potato soup?

    You don’t have to, and leaving the peels on can help potatoes stay more firm in the soup.

    What to Serve with This Soup

    This house salad recipe and these fluffy cheese biscuits go amazing with this loaded baked potato soup! They’re both easy and round out the meal wonderfully!

    Related Recipes

    If you love creamy soups like this loaded baked potato soup, then you can’t miss out on this creamy clam chowder (It also uses potatoes)! Or, if you like a little spice, this buffalo chicken soup is a family favorite.

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Loaded Potato Soup in small crock, next to fabric napkin.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Loaded Baked Potato Soup Recipe

    This loaded baked potato soup recipe is so easy to make and is full of comforting ingredients. Best of all it can be made in under 30 minutes.
    Course Soup
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 461kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 6 pounds russet potatoes
    • ½ cup chicken broth
    • ½ cup heavy whipping cream
    • 2 cups whole milk
    • 1 Tablespoon onion powder
    • 1 Tablespoon garlic powder
    • ⅓ cup sour cream
    • ¼ cup parmesan cheese
    • 1 cup real bacon bits
    • 1 package ranch seasoning
    • salt and pepper to taste

    Instructions

    • Wash, peel, and cut potatoes into small ½ inch cubes or so.
    • Boil potatoes in water, in a large stock pot until tender.
    • Drain potatoes and return to pot.
    • Add in remaining ingredients, and let simmer for at least 10-15 minutes to let cook through.

    Notes

    Tip: Potato soup can have a chunky texture or smooth. If you prefer a smoother texture, mash the cooked potatoes before adding all of the ingredients together.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 461kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 47mg | Sodium: 404mg | Potassium: 1627mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 400IU | Vitamin C: 20.6mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 3.2mg

    Air Fryer Brats

    January 5, 2025

    Bratwursts cooked in the air fryer, resting on a plate.

    Air Fryer Brats: Cooking brats in the air fryer is easy, and it leaves them with a golden, crisp outer edge and a juicy flavor!

    Bratwursts that were cooked in the air fryer, resting on a plate.

    Brats only take about 10 minutes in a 400° air fryer so dinner or lunch is on the table in a flash! Cooking brats on the stove takes about 25 minutes, so a bit longer but it’s definitely an option.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Want to Cook Brats in the Air Fryer

    Sure, cooking brats in the oven is easy. But for some reason, using the air fryer almost feels easier… and perhaps it’s because you don’t have to heat up the entire oven just for a small batch of brats.

    And honestly, I almost feel silly calling this a “recipe” since it’s so stinking easy. You open the package of brats, put them in the air fryer, and then eat them. That’s it!

    But it IS helpful to know how long to cook brats in the air fryer and what temperature to cook them at, AND to see what kinds of toppings you can have for brats, so I decided it was necessary to create this “recipe.”

    Cooking Raw Brats in the Air Fryer

    Now for this recipe, I’m using raw, or uncooked, brats from the grocery store.

    Can you reheat pre-cooked or leftover sausages (brats)? You bet… it won’t take as long, but it’s definitely the way I re-heat them. For some reason, it’s so much better in the air fryer!

    Now, if you ask me, my favorite brats are the flavored brats… and I’m talking the brats that you can’t get at the grocery store. I love finding hole-in-the-wall butcher shops to see if they offer out-of-the-box flavors in uncooked brats like: chipotle brats, or something fun like maple and brown sugar.

    More Air Fryer Recipes You’ll Love:

    • Air Fryer Apple Chips
    • Air Fryer Burgers
    • Air Fryer Bacon

    How to Cook Brats in the Air Fryer

    Depending on your air fryer model, some say to preheat before cooking. But let’s get real, I’m cooking brats, not a gourmet soufflé. So I just place them in the basket and get to cooking.

    How long do you cook brats in the air fryer?

    When I don’t preheat my air fryer, I like to cook them at 400° for about 10 minutes. (Or until the internal temperature reaches 160°.)

    NOTE: If you preheat your air fryer, your cooking time may not be as long.

    Chefman Air Fryer Brats

    “Do I Have to Flip Brats in the Air Fryer?”

    You don’t have to but if you can, it does help it cook through more evenly. But I’ll say… my Chefman air fryer is a boss and it rarely fails me if I forget to flip. But for those who use an air fryer/toaster oven combo… it may be more ideal to flip the brats after 5 minutes.

    Johnsonville Brats

    Johnsonville is the standard in our house unless we visit a butcher shop and get a fun, local flavor.

    Johnsonville has a lot of different flavors of brats and sausages that we like to rotate through, like:

    • Irish O’Garlic
    • Hot & Spicy
    • Cheddar & Bacon
    • … and they have more fun flavors!

    For today’s recipe, we’re sticking with the Original brats. But if you have Italian sausages to cook, we love cooking those sausages in the oven too!

    Johnsonville Brats Recipe

    “Do I Need to use cooking spray for the air fryer?”

    Most air fryer manuals say not to us cooking spray on the baskets because it can damage the coating… so I never spray mine. And for brats, I never have a problem with them sticking.

    But if you do have problems with food sticking, you can try using parchment paper! This may mess with the texture of foods frying (since air won’t be able to freely circulate like it does without it) but it’s worth a try!

    Place brats in air fryer basket

    Look at those beauties after 10 minutes! They’re plump, juicy, and ready to fall onto a brat bun with your favorite toppings!

    Cooked brats in air fryer

    Tips for Cooking Brats

    • I absolutely LOVE making a package (or two) of brats on a Sunday evening so we can eat them all week for lunch or a last-minute dinner idea.

      Granted… it only takes 10 minutes to cook them from raw, but my boys and husband see cooked brats in the fridge and for some reason, they think it’s easier to grab and go!
    • If eating brats on a bun isn’t your style, or if you’re trying to do low-carb or keto, eating them plain, and slicing them in to small circles is a great way to eat them. Dip them in a fun sauce like horseradish mustard, bbq sauce or a butter-garlic aioli
    Brats in air fryer

    Bratwurst Topping Ideas

    When I was taking photos for this post, I didn’t have any of my favorite toppings for brats on hand.

    But you know what, this is a post about how to cook brats in the air fryer anyway, not “brat topping ideas.”

    However, I’m going to go out on a limb here (a very short one) and say that you’d like some ideas to fancy up your brat life, am I right? So I’ll give you some of our favorite toppings to solidify your brat-making experience here.

    Brat (and Sausage) Toppings:

    • Sauerkraut (Fun fact: I ate 3 foot-long brats with sauerkraut on them at a Cardinals baseball game 15 years ago and I wasn’t miserable and could have gone for a 4th.)
    • Onions (Get fancy and saute onions in butter for a punch of flavor that will have the neighbor’s husband running over to see what that glorious smell is – so close the windows so that doesn’t happen. Who needs more men begging for dinner?)
    • Peppers – (See above note. Saute… close the windows.)
    • Spicy Mustard
    • BBQ Sauce
    • Jalapenos
    • Nacho Cheese
    • Pizza Sauce (and add mozzarella cheese for a pizza brat/dog)
    • Crumbled bacon
    • Mac & Cheese
    • …. and see my Hot Dog Bar for more fun ideas!
    Brats in air fryer

    Related Recipes

    I love easy-to-make meals like this one, that leaves room for customizing. Here are other recipes you’ll love that are quick, simple, and fun to customize:

    • Baked BBQ Pork Steaks on white plate
      Pork Steaks in the Oven
    • Oven baked hot dogs, on hot dog buns.
      Hot Dogs in the Oven
    • Breakfast sausage links, cooked, and sitting on a white plate.
      How to Cook Breakfast Sausage in the Oven
    • Cooked sausage patty being held by tongs.
      How to Cook Sausage Patties in the Oven

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Bratwursts cooked in the air fryer, resting on a plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 7 votes

    Easy Air Fryer Brats

    Air Fryer Brats: Cooking raw brats only takes about 10 minutes in a 400° air fryer, creating juicy brats and it gets dinner on the table in a flash!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 brats
    Calories 220kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • air fryer

    Ingredients

    • 5 brats raw, uncooked
    • Toppings Desired See post for ideas!

    Instructions

    • Place brats in a single layer in the fryer basket.
    • Cook at 400° for 10 minutes (flip half way through) or until internal temperature of brats reach 160°. (See notes.)

    Notes

    Air fryers can vary with cook times and temperatures, depending on the brand and style. It’s always best to test and watch the food you’re cooking carefully to make sure yours doesn’t cook faster/stronger than what mine may.
    Also, make sure to check the internal temperature of the brats to make sure they reach 160° before consuming.
    Make a package (or two) of brats at a time and leave them in the refrigerator for an easy to reheat snack, lunch or dinner.
    If eating brats on a bun isn’t your style, or if you’re trying to do low-carb or keto, eating them plain, and slicing them in to small circles is a great way to eat them. Dip them in a fun sauce like horseradish mustard, bbq sauce, or a butter-garlic aioli

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1brat | Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 558mg | Potassium: 230mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg

    If you enjoyed this post, be sure to follow me on Instagram, Facebook, Pinterest and YouTube! Share a photo of your recipe and use the hashtag #Fantabulosity so I can find it and follow along!

    Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel

    December 28, 2024

    Chicken spaghetti in baking dish, being lifted out with serving spoon.

    This Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel is the ultimate creamy, cheesy comfort food! Shredded chicken, Rotel tomatoes, and topped with cheddar cheese, it’s a quick and easy dinner your family will love.

    Perfect for weeknights or when you need a satisfying, crowd-pleasing meal, and ready in 45 minutes!

    Chicken spaghetti with Rotel being lifted out of the baking dish.

    Pasta recipes like this Rotel Pasta, Hamburger Mac and Cheese, and Chicken Alfredo Lasagna are all comfort food recipes that are easy to make and family-friendly. This chicken spaghetti with Rotel is another dinner recipe to add to the rotation.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Highlights

    • Quick: Ready in less than an hour, this recipe is a great option when you need a comforting dish for your family without spending a lot of time in the kitchen.
    • Ease: With just a few easy steps, this recipe is prepped and ready to bake in the oven. This recipe is great for beginners.
    • Simple Ingredients: The ingredients can be found in most grocery stores, making it a recipe that can be made often.

    Ingredients Needed

    Ingredients for chicken spaghetti with Rotel.

    You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. I’ve provided notes about some of the key ingredients below:

    • Cheddar Cheese: Try Colby Jack or Monterey Jack for a different twist.
    • Chicken: You can boil chicken breasts for this recipe, cook chicken breasts in the slow cooker, bake, or even cook the chicken on the stove-top. Or, you can also use a rotisserie chicken. Make this rotisserie chicken stock after!
    • Chicken Broth: If you don’t have chicken broth on hand, and you want to make your own homemade chicken broth, that’s an option as well.

    How to Make Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel

    Step 1: Preheat the oven to 350°F.

    You’ll also want to boil spaghetti noodles and drain them before assembling the chicken spaghetti.

    Soups and wet ingredients combined in mixing bowl.
    Step 2: Combine soups, cream, broth, Rotel and seasonings.
    Chicken, noodles, cheese in mixing bowl.
    Step 3: Add chicken, 1 cup cheese, and spaghetti noodles.
    Chicken spaghetti in baking dish.
    Step 4: Pour spaghetti in to prepared baking dish.
    Shredded cheese on top of chicken spaghetti in baking dish.
    Step 5: Sprinkle remaining cheese on top.
    Baked chicken spaghetti in baking dish.
    Step 6: Bake for 30-35 minutes.

    Recipe Tips

    • Love spice? Using the “hot” Rotel is a great way to make this chicken spaghetti spicy.
    • Cooked Spaghetti: Make sure to cook the spaghetti noodles to al dente, and not more, as it can result in a mushy casserole.
    Cooked chicken spaghetti in plate, with fork digging a bite out.

    FAQs

    Can I use a different type of pasta for chicken spaghetti?

    Yes, fettuccine, penne, or rotini would work well if you don’t have spaghetti.

    Can I make chicken spaghetti ahead of time?

    Absolutely! Assemble the chicken spaghetti casserole, cover, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. Bake when ready.

    What is another name for chicken spaghetti?

    It may also be called tetrazzini which is what chicken and spaghetti together is also called in America.

    Storage

    Leftovers: Chicken Spaghetti Casserole should be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    To Reheat: Warm in the oven at 350°F for 15-20 minutes or microwave until heated through.

    To Freeze: Assemble the casserole without baking and freeze tightly wrapped for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before baking.

    What to Serve with Chicken Spaghetti

    As with most pasta dishes, a side salad pairs wonderfully with the dish. Or, slices of Italian white bread, or this cheesy pull-apart bread are also great options.

    Related Recipes

    • A fork holding a bite of fried spaghetti.
      Fried Spaghetti
    • Close up of venison spaghetti in
      Venison Spaghetti
    • Chicken Bolognese on spaghetti noodles.
      Chicken Bolognese Recipe
    • Crockpot Chicken Pasta on wooden spoon.
      Crockpot Chicken Pasta

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chicken spaghetti in baking dish, being lifted out with serving spoon.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel

    Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel: Topped with cheese, baked in the oven, this casserole is a family favorite, that uses simple ingredients and ready in under and hour.
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine Italian
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 536kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 cups cooked chicken shredded
    • 8 ounces cooked spaghetti noodles
    • 10.5 ounce can cream of chicken soup
    • 10.5 ounce can cream of mushroom soup
    • 1 cup sour cream
    • 1 cup chicken broth
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 10 ounce can Rotel tomatoes drained (or your favorite brand of diced tomatoes with green chilies)
    • 2 cups shredded cheddar cheese divided

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. Grease a 9×13-inch baking dish.
    • Cook the spaghetti in a large pot of salted water until al dente. Drain and set aside.
      8 ounces cooked spaghetti noodles
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the chicken broth, sour cream, cream of chicken soup, cream of mushroom soup, drained Rotel tomatoes, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and black pepper.
      10.5 ounce can cream of chicken soup, 10.5 ounce can cream of mushroom soup, 1 cup sour cream, 1 cup chicken broth, 1 teaspoon garlic powder, 1 teaspoon onion powder, ½ teaspoon salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper, 10 ounce can Rotel tomatoes
    • Stir in the cooked chicken, drained spaghetti, and 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese until evenly combined.
      2 cups cooked chicken, 2 cups shredded cheddar cheese
    • Pour the mixture into the prepared baking dish and spread evenly.
    • Sprinkle the remaining 1 cup of shredded cheddar cheese over the top.
    • Bake for 30-35 minutes, or until the cheese is melted and the casserole is bubbly.
    • Let it cool for 5 minutes before serving.

    Video

    Notes

    To Make Ahead: Assemble the chicken spaghetti, cover, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. Bake when ready.
    Leftovers: Chicken Spaghetti Casserole should be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 536kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 103mg | Sodium: 1340mg | Potassium: 461mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 782IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 346mg | Iron: 3mg

    Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    December 26, 2024

    Waffle breakfast sandwich on plate.

    Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches: Crispy bacon, melty cheese, fluffy scrambled eggs drizzled with syrup, piled on warm crispy waffles, makes for a new delicious and easy breakfast idea!

    Waffle breakfast sandwich on plate.

    Breakfast sandwiches can be easy to make, using simple ingredients and are great for meal planning and freezing for a quick breakfast.

    This bacon egg and cheese sandwich is similar, using brioche buns instead of waffles. Or, for the same breakfast sandwich vibe, this fried bologna and egg sandwich or this pineapple and ham breakfast sandwich, are both fun twists to a traditional breakfast sandwich.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Recipe Highlights

    • A Fun Twist: Breakfast sandwiches can be a great, easy breakfast idea but the same sandwich can get old. Inspired by my waffle burger, instead of using regular bread, using toasty waffles adds a different texture and flavor to this common breakfast sandwich.
    • Easy to Make: A quick prep time and easy assembly, make this recipe a great choice for a grab-and-go option for even to make for a large crowd if hosting.
    • Presentation: If hosting a brunch, these breakfast sandwiches look amazing and guests love how different they are, since waffles are serving as the “bun” in this sandwich. Tip: Wrap the bottom half of the sandwiches in parchment paper to help hold them together to make them easier to hold, and to give them a classy look. Or, go with the waffle charcuterie idea, and allow guests to do a build-your-own breakfast sandwich.

    Ingredients

    The ingredients are simple for this recipe but I’ve provided some notes below about some of the key ingredients.

    Labeled ingredients for waffle breakfast sandwiches.
    • Waffles – For added variety, use flavored waffles like fluffy blueberry waffles or Belgian chocolate chip waffles. Or, for some added flair, these rainbow waffles are a colorful way to add fun to waffle breakfast sandwiches.
    • Cheese – For a different flavor profile, swap American cheese for cheddar or Swiss. Double the cheese for extra cheesy goodness! 
    • Bacon – There are many different ways you can cook bacon for this recipe. Cooking bacon in the oven is my favorite but you can also cook bacon in the air fryer for a faster method. You can also use turkey bacon cooked in the oven for this recipe as well.

    How to Make Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    Eggs, pepper and milk in a mixing bowl.
    Step 1: Begin by whipping eggs, milk and spices for scrambled eggs.
    Scrambled eggs made, with slices of American cheese on top.
    Step 2: Cook eggs in skillet and top with slices of cheese.
    Cooked bacon slices on top of waffles.
    Step 3: Layer cooked bacon on to cooked waffles.
    Eggs with melted cheese on top of bacon slices.
    Step 4: Top bacon with scrambled eggs with cheese.
    Waffles on top of eggs, cheese and bacon.

    Step 5: Top sandwich with another waffle. (Optional: Drizzle syrup on top of scrambled eggs before topping with second waffle if desired.)

    Syrup being drizzled on waffle breakfast sandwich.

    Recipe Tips

    • Cooking Waffles – A toaster is a great way to quickly make waffles. You can also cook frozen waffles in the air fryer. Then, if desired, heat the oven to 200 degrees and place the toasted waffles on a sheet pan to keep them warm while you prepare the rest of the sandwich. 
    • Crispy Bacon – Making sure the bacon is crispy, is key. It makes the sandwich easier to bite in to since the bacon breaks aways instead of pulls out.
    • Kid-Friendly – Mini waffles can also be used to create bite-sized sandwiches perfect for little hands.
    • Additional Sandwich Options – Want more? You can also layer on cooked frozen hashbrown patties, or even cooked sausage patties.

    How to Store Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    • Leftover Sandwiches: Wrap assembled sandwiches tightly in foil and store them in the refrigerator for up to 24 hours. Reheat in the oven at 350°F for 10 minutes.
    • Make-Ahead: Prepare bacon and scrambled eggs in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Assemble the sandwiches just before serving for the best texture.
    • Freezer Friendly: Assemble the sandwiches, allow them to cool and then wrap in aluminum foil, or my favorite, the “Press ‘n Seal” wrap and then store in a freezer-safe bag for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to eat them, unwrap then pop them on a baking sheet for 5 to 10 minutes at 350 degrees F.

    FAQs

    How to make the viral waffle house sandwich?

    Layer shredded hashbrowns, sausage, scrambled eggs, cheese and bacon between two waffles and drizzle with maple syrup.

    What are breakfast sandwich topping ideas?

    Bacon, sausage, ham, fried chicken, egg, cheese, avocado, peppers, and spinach, are great breakfas sandwich ideas.

    Similar Recipes

    • A close up photo of a stack of breakfast slider sandwiches
      Hawaiian Roll Breakfast Sliders
    • Mini bagel breakfast sliders stacked on top of one another on a white plate.
      Bagel Breakfast Sliders
    • Fried peanut butter and jelly sandwich, sliced on white plate.
      Fried Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwich
    • Close up of peanut butter and jelly sandwich
      How to Make a Peanut Butter and Jelly Sandwich

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Waffle breakfast sandwich on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 3 votes

    Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches – these easy breakfast sandwiches take classic breakfast staples and combine them into a fun out-of-the-box breakfast idea.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 sandwiches
    Calories 529kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 8 waffles store-bought frozen works great
    • 8 eggs
    • 2 tablespoons milk
    • 2 tablespoons butter
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt or to taste
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper or to taste
    • 8 slices cooked bacon crispy – See how to cook bacon
    • 4 slices American cheese
    • pancake syrup optional, for drizzling

    Instructions

    • Toast the waffles until they are golden brown and crisp. Set aside on a plate.
    • Cook the bacon in a skillet over medium heat until crispy. Transfer to a paper towel-lined plate to drain the excess grease.
    • In a mixing bowl, crack 8 large eggs and add 2 tablespoons of 2% milk, 1 teaspoon kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon ground black pepper. Using a whisk or fork, beat the mixture briskly until the yolks and whites are fully blended and the surface appears slightly bubbly. This step incorporates air into the eggs, which helps achieve a light and fluffy texture when cooked. 
    • Heat a nonstick skillet over medium-low heat. Add 2 tablespoons unsalted butter and let it melt gently, coating the bottom of the pan. Pour the whisked eggs into the pan. Let them sit undisturbed for a few seconds until the edges begin to set.
    • Using a silicone spatula, gently push the eggs from the edges toward the center. Stir in a circular motion to create soft curds. Be careful not to over-stir, as this will break the texture. When the eggs are mostly set but still slightly wet, place four slices of American cheese over the eggs in four sections and heat until melted. Remove from heat and use your spatula to section the eggs into four equal portions.
    • Lay one waffle on a plate as the base. Place 2 slices of crispy bacon on the waffle. Top with 1 portion of fluffy scrambled eggs with cheese. Drizzle with pancake syrup if desired. Finish with a second toasted waffle on top. Repeat for all 4 waffle sandwiches.
    • Serve immediately while warm. Add extra syrup on the side for dipping.

    Notes

    Bacon Tip: Making sure your bacon is crispy, makes the sandwich easier to bite in to and eat.
    Freezer Friendly: Assemble the sandwiches, allow them to cool and then wrap in aluminum foil, or my favorite, the “Press ‘n Seal” wrap and then store in a freezer-safe bag for up to 3 months. When you’re ready to eat them, unwrap then pop them on a baking sheet for 5 to 10 minutes at 350 degrees F.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1sandwich | Calories: 529kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 398mg | Sodium: 1784mg | Potassium: 306mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1933IU | Calcium: 445mg | Iron: 6mg

    Crock Pot Cube Steak

    December 24, 2024

    Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, sitting on white plate.

    Crock Pot Cube Steak: an easy dinner recipe, that takes just 5 minutes to prep in the slow cooker! This recipe combines the simpleness of a slow cooker recipe with the rich, hearty flavors of cube steak and traditional seasonings.

    Can’t get enough steak recipes in the slow cooker? This slow cooker steak, is similar to this cube steak recipe, and one of the easiest recipes out there!

    Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, sitting in front of slow cooker.

    Much like our oven-baked steak, or even our slow cooker pork steaks, the result of this recipe is succulently tender, delightfully flavorful, and wonderfully comforting—making it an exceptional choice for both weeknight dinners and special occasions the whole family will love. 

    Inspired to try more crock pot recipes?  Crock Pot Chicken Enchiladas are always a popular option in our house and are simple to make for even the fussiest eater. Or if you want a delicious, cheesy recipe to go with a meat dish, try some Crock Pot Cheesy Hashbrowns.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • It uses a few ingredients: With only 4 ingredients, this recipe uses items that you may even have on hand.
    • Very simple recipe: Using pre-mixed soup, this is a simple recipe that doesn’t need a lot of ingredients or cooking experience.
    • Slow cooker comfort food: You can set this up in your slow cooker for a great comfort food option with little hands-on work needed.

    What is Cube Steak?

    Cube steak, also known as minute steak due to its quick cooking time, is a cut of beef that has been tenderized, typically using an electric meat tenderizer or a manual meat mallet. The process of tenderization leaves distinctive cube-shaped indentations on the meat, hence the name “cube steak”. 

    This cut is usually lean and somewhat tough, making it a perfect candidate for slow cooking methods like braising or slow cooking in a crock pot, which allow the meat to become tender and flavorful over time, much like when we make chuck roast in the slow cooker for these shredded beef tacos.

    Ingredients Needed

    I’ve highlighted a couple of ingredients below with some relevant notes. Aside from this, the ingredients needed are pretty basic.

    Labeled ingredients for Crock Pot cube steak on white counter.
    • Steak – You’ll need around 1.5 to 2 pounds of cube steak for this recipe. If you only have ground beef, you’ll love this Salisbury steak recipe!
    • Soup mix – I find a Beefy Onion soup mix is the perfect one to give the steak flavor.
    • Mushroom soup – Get the creaminess needed for the dish from two cans of cream of mushroom soup.

    Substitutions

    Sometimes substitutions can be necessary. Here are some suggestions that can help:

    • Beefy Onion Soup Mix: You can make your own mix at home using dried onion flakes, beef bouillon granules, onion powder, parsley, celery seed, paprika, and black pepper. Another option is to use a combination of vegetable broth and onion powder or minced onions for a similar flavor.
    • Cream of Mushroom Soup: You can substitute with cream of celery soup or cream of chicken soup if you’re looking for a similar texture. If you’d like to avoid canned soup, you can make a homemade white sauce with butter, flour, and milk, then add sautéed mushrooms.
    • Beef Broth: You can swap it with vegetable or chicken broth. You could also use a broth made from a beef bouillon cube or granules if you still want the beef flavor but don’t have the broth on hand.

    Variations

    Here are some variations you might want to try for your crock pot cube steak recipe:

    • Italian Style: Use a packet of Italian dressing mix instead of the Beefy Onion soup mix, and substitute the cream of mushroom soup with marinara sauce. Add in some bell peppers and onions for extra flavor.
    • Creamy Garlic and Herb: Substitute the Beefy Onion soup mix with a blend of dried herbs like rosemary, thyme, and oregano. Use a can of cream of garlic soup instead of cream of mushroom, and consider adding some chopped fresh herbs near the end of cooking.
    • Spicy Mexican: Swap the Beefy Onion soup mix for a packet of taco seasoning, and use enchilada sauce or salsa instead of the cream of mushroom soup. You could also add some canned green chilies or jalapenos for an extra kick.
    • Sweet and Tangy BBQ: Instead of the Beefy Onion soup mix, use your favorite barbecue spice rub. Substitute the cream of mushroom soup with your favorite barbecue sauce, and consider adding a touch of apple cider vinegar for tanginess.

    How to Make Crock Pot Cube Steak

    This cube steak recipe is broken into 2 components:

    • Prepare the ingredients
    • Cook the recipe

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    STEP 1: Mix the ingredients. Combine the soup, broth, and Onion Soup Mix until well blended. (Image 1)

    STEP 2: Add the steak to the crock pot. Place the cubed steak in the slow cooker, being mindful not to overlap them excessively. (Image 2)

    Steps 1-4 Crock Pot cube steaks.

    STEP 3: Add the sauce mixture. Pour the soup mixture evenly over the cube steak. (Image 3)

    STEP 4: Cook the recipe. Place the lid on and cook on high for a duration of 3 hours. (Image 4)

    Slow cooked cubed steak on top of mashed potatoes, on white plate.
    Cooked Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, on white plate.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Cube Steak: For a delectable meal, ensure your cube steak is thoroughly dried before adding it to the crock pot to prevent excess moisture.
    • Seasoning: Don’t skimp on seasoning; season your steak generously before cooking cube steak to enhance the flavor.
    • Layering: When layering your cube steaks in the crock pot, try not to overlap them too much. This ensures even cooking.
    • Cooking Time: Remember, slow and steady wins the race. For the most tender cube steak, opt for a longer cooking time on a lower setting.
    • Resting Time: Let the steak rest for a few minutes after cooking. This allows the juices to be redistributed, resulting in a moist and flavorful steak.
    Bite of Crock Pot cube steak on fork, above plate of mashed potatoes.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I use a different type of steak for this recipe?

    Yes, you can substitute the cube steak with other tender cuts of beef, such as a ribeye or top sirloin. However, keep in mind that the texture and flavor may differ slightly due to the differences in fat content and marbling.

    Can I add vegetables directly into the crock pot?

    Absolutely! Vegetables like carrots, potatoes, or bell peppers can be added directly into the crock pot. Just ensure they are cut into larger pieces to prevent them from overcooking.

    Can I make this recipe in an Instant Pot instead?

    Yes, this recipe can be adapted for an Instant Pot. However, the cooking time will need to be adjusted accordingly as the Instant Pot cooks much faster than a traditional slow cooker.

    Can I cook the cube steak on a stovetop instead?

    Yes, this recipe can be prepared on a stovetop. Fry the cube steaks in a pan over medium heat until browned on both sides, then add the soup mixture and simmer until the steak is tender and the sauce has thickened.

    Can you cook raw steak in a crock pot?

    Absolutely! You can definitely cook raw steak in a crock pot. Slow cookers are designed to cook food over a long period of time, which makes them ideal for tenderizing tougher cuts of meat like steak. The low and slow cooking process allows the steak to become wonderfully tender while absorbing the flavors of the sauce and seasonings. Just remember, always cook the steak on low for an extended period to ensure that it is both safe to eat and deliciously tender.

    What to Serve with Crock Pot Cube Steak

    The beauty of Crock Pot Cube Steak is that it pairs well with a variety of side dishes. Here are some suggestions:

    1. Mashed Potatoes: The classic comfort food side, mashed potatoes pair perfectly with the hearty cube steak. Their creaminess complements the steak and savory gravy.
    2. Steamed Vegetables: A simple side of steamed vegetables such as broccoli, carrots, or green beans can provide a much-needed fresh counterpart to the rich cube steak.
    3. Rice: Whether it’s brown, wild or white rice, this versatile grain is excellent at soaking up the delicious gravy of the cube steak.
    4. Bread Rolls: A warm, crusty bread roll would be excellent for sopping up any leftover gravy on your plate.
    5. Salad: A light garden salad with a tangy vinaigrette can help cut through the richness of the cube steak dish and add a refreshing element to your meal.

    Storage

    Allow the steak and gravy to cool completely before storing. This prevents condensation from forming in the storage container, which can lead to a diluted gravy. Transfer the cooled steak and gravy to an airtight container. Refrigerate for up to 3-4 days.

    When you’re ready to enjoy the leftover cube steak, warm them up in a saucepan over medium heat or in the microwave until heated through.

    Freezing leftovers is also possible. After the steak and gravy have completely cooled, portion them into freezer-safe container or resealable plastic bags in the serving sizes you prefer. To eat, thaw the steak and gravy in the refrigerator overnight before reheating in a saucepan or microwave.

    More Steak Recipes You’ll Love

    If making this slow cooker cube steak and gravy will have you wanting to try other types of steak, why not try learning how to cook steak in the oven with this simple process? Or enjoy the best Steak Bites with this tasty and easy recipe.

    • steak bites in white dish with butter on top
      The BEST Steak Bites
    • Deer steaks on platter topped with butter and parsley.
      Deer Steak Recipe – On the Stovetop
    • Baked BBQ Pork Steaks on white plate
      Pork Steaks in the Oven
    • Sliced of venison that was cooked with a deer marinade.
      Venison Marinade + Grilled Deer Steak Recipe

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Crock Pot cube steak on top of mashed potatoes, sitting on white plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Crock Pot Cube Steak

    Crock Pot Cube Steak: Using only 4 ingredients, this dump-and-go recipe is a great dinner idea that's flavorful, so tender, easy and hearty for the family.
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 hours hours
    Total Time 3 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 steaks
    Calories 143kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 pack cube steaks probably 1.5-2 pounds – about 3-4 steaks
    • 1 package Beefy Onion Soup Mix
    • 2 cans cream of mushroom soup
    • 1 cup beef broth

    Instructions

    • Mix soup, broth and Onion Soup Mix together until evenly mixed together.
    • Arrange cube steaks on bottom of slow cooker, trying not to overlap too much.
    • Pour soup mixture over cube steak.
    • Cover with lid and cook on high for 3 hours.
    • Serve over mashed potatoes or egg noodles.

    Notes

    Tips:
    • When layering your cube steaks in the crock pot, try not to overlap them too much. This ensures even cooking.
    • Feel free to add vegetables like carrots, potatoes, or bell peppers. They can be added directly into the crock pot. Just ensure they are cut into larger pieces to prevent them from overcooking.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1steak | Calories: 143kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 8mg | Sodium: 2248mg | Potassium: 296mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 2IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg

    Cinnamon Roll Casserole

    December 22, 2024

    slice of cinnamon roll casserole on plate

    An easy Cinnamon Roll Casserole that’s perfect for breakfast, made of cinnamon roll pieces, butter, cinnamon, vanilla, heavy cream, syrup and eggs!

    cinnamon roll casserole on white plate

    If you love cinnamon, you’ll also love to see how we make cinnamon rolls in the air fryer and this cinnamon coffee cake recipe!

    Why You’ll Love this Recipe

    Oh heavens. Your Saturday morning is going to be complete with this easy breakfast recipe. But specifically, here’s why you’ll love this one:

    • This recipe is made using refrigerated cinnamon rolls! YES! We love shortcuts in the kitchen (like when we used crescent rolls for this biscuit and gravy casserole) and this recipe is no exception!
    • You can also make this recipe ahead of time and I give instructions and tips on how to do that below!
    slice of cinnamon roll casserole on white plate with baking dish in back

    Ingredient Notes

    By using canned cinnamon rolls, it really cuts down on the other simple ingredients for this recipe!

    labeled ingredients for cinnamon roll casserole, on counter
    • unsalted butter – You can use salted butter too, and it turns out just fine!
    • canned cinnamon rolls – We used Pillsbury cinnamon rolls but any brand/type will do, and either the original icing or cream cheese icing works great as well.

    To skip right to the recipe card where you can find the ingredients and instructions for this easy recipe, just scroll down to the bottom of this post and there you’ll find where you can print and gather all of the info that you need!

    Step by Step Directions

    1. First, preheat the oven to 375 degrees and lightly spray an 8×8 baking pan.
    2. Then start breaking the cinnamon rolls in to small pieces and place in to greased baking dish.
    small pieces of cinnamon rolls in dish
    Break cinnamon rolls in to pieces
    Melted butter pouring on top
    Pour melted butter on top
    1. In a medium bowl, beat together the eggs, heavy cream, cinnamon, and vanilla until combined well.
    heavy cream pouring in bowl with eggs
    Pour heavy cream in eggs
    Cinnamon pouring in to bowl
    Add cinnamon
    Vanilla pouring in to bowl
    Add vanilla
    Mixing ingredients together in bowl
    Mix ingredients together
    1. Pour egg mixture over the top of the cinnamon rolls in the dish.
    fully mixed batter in bowl
    Ready for pouring
    Pouring batter over cinnamon rolls
    Pour batter over rolls
    1. Drizzle the maple syrup all over the top.
    Pouring syrup over rolls
    Pour syrup over rolls
    1. Place in your preheated oven and bake for 20-30 minutes (see tips below for your desired baking time), until the top is golden brown, and let cool for a few minutes.
    baked cinnamon roll casserole
    Fresh from the oven
    1. Remove the metal lid from the icing container and microwave the icing for 5-10 seconds, until it’s thin enough to drizzle. Then, pour the icing all over the top of the casserole!
    Pouring icing over cinnamon rolls
    Pour icing on top
    icing all over top of cinnamon rolls
    Icing on top

    How Long to Bake Cinnamon Roll Casserole

    If you see the photos below, the first image of the cinnamon roll casserole is baked for 20 minutes at 375°. This is a more gooey, soft, doughy center, that some prefer. For instance, if you love a gooey cinnamon roll… then you may prefer 20 minutes.

    The second image is the cinnamon roll casserole baked for 25-30 minutes, giving the casserole more of a “cooked” fluffy center that others may prefer.

    cinnamon roll casserole on spatula
    Baked for 20 minutes
    Cinnamon roll casserole on spatula
    Baked for 25-30 minutes
    1. When the casserole is baked to your desired level, sprinkle powdered sugar on top, if desired and enjoy!
    Powdered sugar on top of casserole
    Sprinkle powdered sugar

    Keep in mind, this delicious breakfast casserole is best served as a warm casserole, with a little extra syrup and powdered sugar.

    Cinnamon roll casserole bite on fork

    FAQs

    Can I double this cinnamon roll casserole recipe?

    Absolutely! Just double the ingredients and use an 8×11 baking pan or casserole dish. Cooking time should still be the same, but keep in mind how gooey you want the center. See notes in post for different bake time.

    What about a 9×13 pan? Although this pan size may be more common in your home, it may work ok but I haven’t tried this. I caution against it because there’s a lot of space left between the cinnamon roll pieces and this allows the egg/cream mixture to sit, and could be sections of a scrambled egg texture.

    Can I make cinnamon roll casserole in advance?

    This casserole can all be put together the night before, covered and stored in the refrigerator, and then baked the next morning. The baking temperature stays the same but since the casserole will be really cold from refrigeration, you may want to leave it to sit out on the counter for 30 minutes or so before baking may keep the baking time but not necessary.

    How do you store this sweet breakfast casserole?

    If you happen to have leftovers of this cinnamon roll breakfast bake, store in an airtight container or allow casserole to come to room temperature and place plastic wrap on top of baking dish and place in the refrigerator. For best results, enjoy the next morning or within 5 days.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    Now although I’ve called this a cinnamon roll casserole, this could easily be called a cinnamon roll french toast casserole because of the eggs and maple syrup drizzle… so call it whatever you like, and whatever tickles your fancy!

    If you love this easy breakfast casserole recipe, then you’ll adore these other breakfast recipes, such as these pancakes in the oven, this French Toast Bake, and this Easy, Fluffy Pancake Recipe.

    Then of course, if you’d like to browse ALL of the easy breakfast recipes, especially mini cinnamon rolls, you’re sure to find more to add to your weekend favorites for the perfect breakfast or for even a holiday brunch!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    slice of cinnamon roll casserole on plate
    Print Pin
    4.71 from 87 votes

    Cinnamon Roll Casserole

    An easy Cinnamon Roll Casserole that's perfect for breakfast, made of cinnamon roll pieces, butter, cinnamon, vanilla, heavy cream, syrup and eggs!
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 382kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 12.4 ounces can Pillsbury Original Icing Cinnamon Rolls
    • 3 large eggs
    • ¼ cup heavy cream
    • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ cup maple syrup
    • powdered sugar if desired

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 375 degrees and lightly spray an 8×8 baking pan with non-stick cooking spray.
    • Break cinnamon rolls apart in to small pieces and place in greased baking dish.
    • Melt the butter and pour it on top of cinnamon rolls.
    • In a medium bowl, beat together the eggs, heavy cream, cinnamon and vanilla until well combined. Pour over the top of the cinnamon rolls in the dish. 
    • Drizzle the maple syrup all over the top. 
    • Bake for 20-25 minutes, until top is golden brown. Cool for a few minutes. (See notes in post for specific baking times for desired texture.)
    • Remove the metal lid from the icing container and microwave the icing for 5-10 seconds, until it’s thin enough to drizzle. 
    • Pour the icing all over the top. Best served warm with a little extra syrup and powdered sugar. 

    Video

    Notes

    Making cinnamon roll casserole in advance:
    This casserole can all be put together the night before, covered and stored in the refrigerator, and then baked the next morning. The baking temperature stays the same but since the casserole will be really cold from refrigeration, you may want to leave it to sit out on the counter for 30 minutes or so before baking may keep the baking time but not necessary.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 382kcal | Carbohydrates: 48g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 114mg | Sodium: 462mg | Potassium: 108mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 398IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 54mg | Iron: 1mg

    Sugar Cookie Fudge

    December 22, 2024

    Close up photo of stacked squares of white chocolate fudge topped with red, green and white sprinkles

    Sugar Cookie Fudge: This super smooth, no-bake white chocolate fudge tastes like a classic Christmas sugar cookie and is topped with festive, Christmas sprinkles!

    A white plate holding pieces of white fudge topped with red, white and green sprinkles is in the center of the photo

    You guys! Christmas time is just my favorite. And this type of holiday dessert recipe makes me so happy. It combines two of my very favorite things: sugar cookies and cookie dough fudge! It tastes like sugar cookie dough but I don’t have to heat up my oven. This sugar cookie fudge recipe will be on repeat all holiday season long.

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    Let’s all say it together: no bake! This no-bake sugar cookie Christmas fudge is made with one saucepan and one baking sheet and just needs to chill in the fridge. It doesn’t get much easier than that. We love it as much as this no bake candy cane pie or these no-bake cornflake cookies!

    Easy recipes like this one are perfect for edible gift giving and squares of creamy fudge make a great addition to those Christmas cookie trays.

    Just by changing the colors of the festive sprinkles you add to the top of the fudge, you can make this fudge for any holiday. Red and pink sprinkles for Valentine’s Day, green jimmies for St. Patrick’s Day, pastel eggs and bunnies for Easter … there are so many holiday options!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    A quick trip to the grocery store will provide all of the simple ingredients for this cookie fudge recipe.

    Bowls of ingredients to make Christmas cookie fudge are displayed on a white marble background
    • 12 tablespoons of unsalted butter
    • 1 cup of sugar cookie mix, sifted
    • ¾ cup evaporated milk
    • 3 cups granulated sugar
    • 11 oz. white chocolate chips (one bag)
    • 7 oz. marshmallow fluff (one jar)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 3 tablespoons holiday sprinkles

    See the printable recipe card for this Christmas fudge recipe below with ingredients, nutrition information, and detailed recipe notes.

    How to Make Sugar Cookie Fudge

    If you can stir and pour, you are already qualified to make this white chocolate cookie fudge. But, we’ve still got detailed instructions and step-by-step photos below to walk you through this easy fudge recipe.

    1. First, line a 9×13 baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
    2. Next, melt the butter in a large saucepan over low heat.
    A saucepan holds pats of unmelted butter while bowls of sugar cookie mix and evaporated milk and a whisk surround the pan
    Melt the butter
    A saucepan contains melted butter and bowls of sugar and evaporated milk wait to be added
    Whisk in the cookie mix and milk
    1. To the melted butter, add the sifted sugar cookie mix and whisk it until it is completely blended.
    2. Now, add the evaporated milk and continue to whisk and cook over medium heat until the mixture is hot.
    3. Then, add the granulated sugar and continue to whisk and cook over medium-high heat for about 5-7 minutes until the mixture comes to a rolling boil.
    4. Add the white chocolate chips and stir until the chips have melted and incorporated into the mixture in the saucepan.
    A saucepan is shown that contains a butter and sugar cookie mixture while a whisk and bowls of other ingredients surround the pan
    Add granulated sugar
    A saucepan is shown with a melted white chocolate mixture surrounded by various recipe ingredients
    Mix in the white chocolate chips
    1. Now, add the marshmallow fluff and vanilla extract. Continue to whisk until all of the ingredients are melted and blended and the mixture is smooth.
    2. Pour the white chocolate fudge into the prepared baking sheet.
    Marshmallow fluff has been added to a saucepan filled with a white chocolate fudge mixture
    Stir in the marshmallow fluff & vanilla
    A 9x13 pan is filled with smooth white fudge
    Pour into the prepared pan
    1. Sprinkle the holiday sprinkles evenly over the top of the fudge.
    A 9x13 pan is filled with white chocolate fudge topped with red, white and green sprinkles
    Add sprinkles!
    1. Refrigerate the fudge for 2 hours or up to overnight. Once the fudge has hardened completely, use a sharp knife to cut it into about 40 bite-sized pieces. Serve by itself or on a Christmas dessert board, and enjoy!
    A birdseye photo of a white plate holding three pieces of white fudge topped with red white and green sprinkles

    Variations

    We have come up with a few different ways that you can make this white chocolate fudge even a little more festive!

    • Add ½ cup of crumbled baked sugar cookies to really amp up the sugar cookie flavor of this holiday fudge recipe.
    • Use a cookie cutter to cut festive shapes from the set fudge. (Bonus: You can nibble on all of the pieces left over after cutting!)
    • Choose your favorite sprinkles! We used nonpareils but you can add jimmies (those long skinny sprinkles) or the fancy holiday shaped sprinkles like trees, santa faces, wreaths, etc.
    • Change the flavor of the cookie mix. I think a snickerdoodle or gingerbread cookie mix would be absolutely delicious for the holidays!
    A white plate holding pieces of white fudge topped with red, white and green sprinkles is in the center of the photo and another plate of fudge and a milk bottle are in the background

    Storage

    To store this Christmas cookie fudge in the refrigerator, layer it between pieces of wax paper and place it in an airtight container.

    To freeze this fudge, wrap it in a layer of waxed paper, then in a layer of plastic wrap or aluminum foil. Store the wrapped fudge in a freezer bag for up to 3 months. When you are ready to eat it, allow it to thaw for 2-3 hours at room temperature.

    A birdseye photo of several plates holding pieces of white chocolate fudge with red white and green sprinkles

    More No Bake Christmas Desserts

    We have it on good authority that no bake desserts just might keep you on Santa’s nice list! Here are some of the most delicious ways to make that list:

    • Christmas Popcorn Balls (with a free gift tag printable!)
    • Cornflake Wreath Cookies
    • Christmas Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball
    • Christmas Tree Cake Dip
    • Holiday Snack Mix

    Or if you don’t have to have a no bake recipe, you’ll love this melted snowman dessert!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Close up photo of stacked squares of white chocolate fudge topped with red, green and white sprinkles
    Print Pin
    5 from 7 votes

    Sugar Cookie Fudge

    Sugar Cookie Fudge: This super smooth, no-bake white chocolate fudge tastes like a classic Christmas sugar cookie and is topped with festive, Christmas sprinkles!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Set Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 40 pieces
    Calories 178kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 12 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • 1 cup sugar cookie mix sifted
    • ¾ cup evaporated milk
    • 3 cups granulated sugar
    • 11 ounces white chocolate chips
    • 7 ounces marshmallow fluff
    • 1 teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • 3 tablespoon holiday sprinkles

    Instructions

    • First, line a 9×13 baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
    • Next, melt the butter in a large saucepan over low heat.
    • To the melted butter, add the sugar cookie mix and whisk it until it is completely blended.
    • Now, add the evaporated milk and continue to whisk and cook over medium heat until the mixture is hot.
    • Then, add the granulated sugar and continue to whisk and cook over medium-high heat for about 5-7 minutes until the mixture comes to a roiling boil.
    • Add the white chocolate chips and stir until the chips have melted and incorporated into the mixture in the saucepan.
    • Now, add the marshmallow fluff and vanilla extract. Continue to whisk until all of the ingredients are melted and blended and the mixture is smooth.
    • Finally, pour the white chocolate fudge into the prepared baking sheet and sprinkle the sprinkles over the top of the fudge.
    • Refrigerate the fudge for 2-4 hours or up to overnight. Once the fudge has hardened completely, use a sharp knife to cut it into about 40 bite sized pieces. Serve and enjoy!

    Video

    Notes

    • Sifting the sugar cookie mix prevents lumps in the fudge.
    • You can use any combination of holiday sprinkles to decorate the top of the fudge.
    • Keep the fudge refrigerated until it is ready to eat. If the fudge gets too warm, it can get sticky.
    • Use a clean, sharp knife to cut the fudge. You may want to wipe it between cuts to keep the edges of the pieces as sharp as possible.
    • To store this sugar cookie fudge in the refrigerator, layer it between pieces of waxed paper in an airtight container.
    • To freeze this fudge, wrap it in a layer of waxed paper, then in a layer of plastic wrap or aluminum foil. Store the wrapped fudge in a ziplock freezer bag. When you are ready to eat it, allow it to thaw for 2-3 hours at room temperature.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1piece | Calories: 178kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 30mg | Potassium: 38mg | Fiber: 0.02g | Sugar: 27g | Vitamin A: 119IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Biscoff Cheesecake

    December 22, 2024

    Slice of Biscoff Cheesecake on white plates

    This Biscoff Cheesecake, or Lotus Cheesecake, is a decadent treat, and so easy to make! Using Biscoff cookies as the crust and Biscoff cookie butter in the filling AND the topping, it’s going to be your new favorite cheesecake! Similar to our Biscoff Pie recipe, the flavors come together to make a delicious dessert!

    Biscoff Cheesecake on white plates

    Quick Overview: It’s best to allow the cheesecake to chill overnight, so planning to make this in advance is ideal! (Although chilling at least 5 hours is perfectly fine!) Bake at 350°.

    Why You’re Going to Love This Cheesecake

    • We love all cheesecake recipes but the Biscoff cookie and Biscoff butter, takes it to a whole new level on flavor, and may just become one of your new favorite dessert recipes! (Along with these Biscoff truffles and Biscoff cupcakes of course.)
    • Biscoff cheesecake is an easy cheesecake, so don’t be intimidated by its beautiful presence!
    • It’s perfect for a special occasion or just because you want a sweet treat on the weekend!
    • The crust is made out of Biscoff cookies (kind of like we did with the Oreo cheesecake) and I have a feeling this will be the crust we use for most of our cheesecakes now! You can use any extra cookies to make this
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    I think what I love most about this Biscoff cheesecake recipe though, is that it uses simple ingredients that you can find at almost any grocery store, and you probably even have most of them on hand.

    ingredients for Biscoff Cheesecake

    See the full recipe card at the bottom of this post, for instructions and easy to read printable card, all in one place!

    Biscoff Cookie Crust

    You can use graham crackers to make the crust but it’s HIGHLY recommended to use Biscoff cookies. (In case it’s helpful, I go in to more detail in this Biscoff pie crust recipe.)

    • 8.8-ounce sleeve Biscoff cookies (you can find these at your local supermarket, and they may also be called “lotus Biscoff biscuits” or “Lotus biscuits”) If you have leftovers, consider this Biscoff fudge recipe!
    • ⅓ cup melted butter
    • Pinch salt

    Cheesecake Filling

    • 4 packages cream cheese
    • 1 cup sugar
    • ¼ cup sour cream
    • ½ cup Biscoff cookie butter spread (you can find this at your local supermarket)
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 teaspoon lemon juice, optional
    • 4 large eggs
    • ¼ cup cookie butter, melted

    Biscoff Cookie Butter and Cookie Topping

    • ¼ cup cookie butter, melted
    • Crushed Biscoff cookies

    How to Make Biscoff Cheesecake

    1. Coat the bottom and sides of a 9” springform pan with nonstick cooking spray.
    2. Place one oven rack in the middle of the oven, and another below it. Place a 13×9” baking dish on the lower rack and carefully fill halfway with boiling water, this will create steam in the oven to help prevent cracking. Preheat oven to 350°F.
    Biscoff cookies in food processor
    Place cookies in food processor.
    Crushed cookies in food processor
    Process until fine crumbs.
    1. Place the sleeve of speculoos cookies in the work bowl of a food processor, pulse until all the cookies are pulverized into crumbs.
    Add butter to cookie crumbs
    Add butter to cookie crumbs.
    buttery cookie crumbs in food prcoessor
    Buttery cookie crumbs.
    1. Transfer to a medium bowl, add the melted butter and a pinch of salt, and mix with a fork until combined.
    glass pressing crumbs in to pan for crust
    Use a glass to press crust.
    pressed Biscoff crust in pan
    Pressed cookie crumbs for crust.
    1. Press into the bottom of the springform pan and 1” up the sides using a flat bottom glass. Freeze while you make the filling.

      *No food processor? Place the cookies in a gallon size zip top bag, squeeze the air out, and crush the cookies with a rolling pin or small mallet.
    Ingredients in bowl for cheesecake filling
    Mix ingredients for cheesecake filling.
    Eggs added in to mixture
    Mix in eggs one at a time.
    1. In a large bowl, beat together the cream cheese, sugar, sour cream, ½ cup cookie butter, vanilla, and lemon juice with a hand mixer on medium-low until smooth.

      Add eggs, one at a time, mixing briefly after each addition until combined.

      Do not overmix the cream cheese mixture. This will create air bubbles which can cause the cheesecake to crack.
    Creamy Biscoff cheesecake filling in bowl
    1. Pour half of the cheesecake filling into the springform pan.
    Half of filling poured in to crust
    1. Drizzle the ¼ cup melted lotus biscoff spread onto the filling, swirl lightly with a butter knife.
    Biscoff butter drizzled in cheesecake
    Pour melted Biscoff butter in to cheesecake.
    Swirled Biscoff butter in to cheesecake filling
    Swirl Biscoff butter with knife.
    1. Pour remaining cheesecake filling on top, smooth with a spatula. Pick the pan up and tap it on the counter a few times to encourage any air bubbles to come up tothe surface. Place the cheesecake in the oven on middle rack.
    Remainder of cheesecake on top
    Pour remainder of cheesecake on top.
    1. Bake the Biscoff cheesecake at 350°F for 30 minutes, then reduce temperature to 300°F for 30 minutes, or untilcooked through.

      NOTE: Cheesecake cooking time can vary greatly. Begin checking it at 55 minutes, it can take up to 1 hour 20 minutes to fully cook.

      The cheesecake is done when the outer edge looks dry, firm, lightly brown and starts to pull away from the pan, the center will still be jiggly and shiny.

      Gently cool the cheesecake: Turn the oven off and leave the oven door closed for 30 minutes, do not open the door.

      After 30 minutes, wedge a kitchen towel in the door to prop it open for another 30 minutes.

      Remove the cheesecake and allow it to cool at room temperature for 2 hours, then place in fridge uncovered for at least 5 hours, overnight is best.

    Cooling the Biscoff cheesecake very slowly also helps prevent cracks. It’s ok if your cheesecake does crack a bit, the melted cookie butter you drizzle on top will cover it right up

    Baked Biscoff Cheesecake
    1. The following day, or just before serving, release cheesecake from springform pan and place on serving platter. Melt cookie butter in microwave for 20 seconds, and pour or drizzle on top of the entire cheesecake, allowing it to drip down the sides.
    Biscoff Butter poured on to cheesecake
    Pour Biscoff Butter on to Cheesecake.
    Spread Biscoff butter on top of cheesecake
    Spread Biscoff butter on to cheesecake.
    1. Sprinkle the top of the cheesecake with crushed Biscoff cookie crumbs.
    Crushed Biscoff cookies on top of cheesecake
    Pour crushed Biscoff cookies on top.

    Serve a slice of this delicious cheesecake, or store for later. (See tips for storing, below.)

    Biscoff Cheesecake with Drizzle

    How to Store Biscoff Cheesecake

    Store any of this leftover cookie butter cheesecake in the refrigerator, as airtight as possible, for up to 5 days. This could be on a cake plate or stand, etc. covered with plastic wrap. You don’t want the flavors from other food in the refrigerator to change the taste of your cheesecake and you also don’t want the cheesecake to dry out.

    Slice of cheesecake held above cake

    Variations

    • The Biscoff Butter drizzle in the middle of the cheesecake is completely optional, but highly recommended!
    • Love whipped cream? You can also top each slice with whipped cream if that’s your style.
    Slice of cheesecake on plate

    Equipment

    You’ll want to use a springform pan for this cheesecake recipe. If you don’t have one, you can get a 9 inch springform pan here.

    Fork holding bite of Biscoff cheesecake

    Biscoff Cheesecake FAQs

    Can you freeze cheesecake?

    Yes! To freeze the cheesecake, wrap tightly in two layers of plastic wrap, followed by aluminum foil. Thaw in the refrigerator overnight. Then, drizzle with melted cookie butter and crushed cookies when ready to serve.

    What Flavor is Biscoff?

    Biscoff cookies have a caramel flavor. The cookies are crispy and have a light flavor! Biscoff butter is similar in texture to peanut butter but has the taste of Biscoff cookies instead!

    Which cheese is best for cheesecake?

    Definitely cream cheese! Mixed with other ingredients to sweeten it for cheesecake, it’s the perfect texture and sweetness!

    Top Tips

    • Use good quality cream cheese, such as the Philadelphia brand. Bargain brands often contain stabilizers that will affect the texture of your cheesecake.
    • The sour cream and fresh lemon juice add a bit of tang to help cut the sweetness. Lemon juice is optional but highly recommended.
    • Soften cream cheese more quickly by cutting it into tiny chunks and spreading it out on a large sheet pan, leaving at room temp for 30-60 minutes. You can also microwave unwrapped cream cheese in 15 second intervals until soft.
    • If your cheesecake batter looks lumpy, your cream cheese was too cold. It can be fixed! Before adding the eggs, microwave the batter for 15 seconds and mix again. If it’s still lumpy, microwave another 15 seconds.
    • To cut the cheesecake cleanly, run a large knife under hot water and wipe dry before each cut.

    More Cake Recipes

    If you loved this Biscoff cheesecake recipe, then you’ll definitely want to check out some of our other favorites:

    • Vanilla Mug cake recipe on spoon
      The BEST Vanilla Mug Cake Recipe
    • A slice of layered carrot cake filled with icing, on a round plate, with more cake behind it in the background.
      Easy Carrot Cake Recipe
    • Slice of ugly duckling cake on white plates.
      Ugly Duckling Cake
    • Slice of cherry chip cake on white plate, sitting next to cherry.
      Cherry Chip Cake

    Recipe

    Slice of Biscoff Cheesecake on white plates
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Biscoff Cheesecake

    This Biscoff Cheesecake, or Lotus Cheesecake, is a decadent treat, and so easy to make! Using Biscoff cookies as the crust and Biscoff cookie butter in the filling AND the topping, it's going to be your new favorite cheesecake!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour
    Cooling Time 8 hours hours
    Total Time 9 hours hours 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 slices
    Calories 624kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 1 9 Inch Springform pan

    Ingredients

    For Biscoff Cookie Crust

    • 8.8 ounce sleeve Biscoff cookies Any speculoos cookies will do
    • ⅓ cup melted butter
    • pinch salt

    Biscoff Cheesecake Filling

    • 4 packages cream cheese 8 ounces each
    • 1 cup sugar
    • ¼ cup sour cream
    • ½ cup Biscoff cookie butter
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 2 teaspoons lemon juice optional
    • 4 large eggs
    • ¼ cup Biscoff Cookie Butter melted

    Biscoff Cheesecake Topping

    • ¼ cup Biscoff Cookie Butter melted
    • crushed Biscoff cookies

    Instructions

    • Coat the bottom and sides of a 9” springform pan with nonstick cooking spray.
    • Place one oven rack in the middle of the oven, and another below it. Place a 13×9”baking dish on the lower rack and carefully fill halfway with boiling water, this will create steam in the oven to help prevent cracking. Preheat oven to 350°F.
    • Place the sleeve of speculoos cookies in the work bowl of a food processor, pulse until all the cookies are pulverized into crumbs. Transfer to a medium bowl, add the melted butter and a pinch of salt, mix with a fork until combined. Press into the bottom of the springform pan and 1” up the sides using a flat bottom glass. Freeze while you make thefilling. *No food processor? See notes.
    • In a large bowl, beat together the cream cheese, sugar, sour cream, ½ cup cookiebutter, vanilla, and lemon juice with a hand mixer on medium low until smooth. Add eggs one at a time, mixing briefly after each addition until combined. Do not overmix.
    • Pour half of the cheesecake filling into the springform pan. Drizzle the ¼ cup melted cookie butter onto the filling, swirl lightly with a butter knife. Pour remaining cheesecake filling on top, smooth with a spatula. Pick the pan up and tap it on the counter a few times to encourage any air bubbles to come up tothe surface. Place the cheesecake inthe oven on middle rack.
    • Bake at 350°F for 30 minutes, then reduce temperature to 300°F for 30 minutes, or until cooked through. The cheesecake is done when the outer edge looks dry, firm, lightly brown and starts to pull away from the pan, the center will still be jiggly and shiny.
      Gently cool the cheesecake: Turn the oven off and leave the door closed for 30 minutes, do not open the door. After 30 minutes, wedge a kitchen towel in the door toprop it open for another 30 minutes. Remove the cheesecake and allow it to cool at room temperature for 2 hours, then place in fridge uncovered for at least 5 hours,overnight is best.
    • Just before serving, release cheesecake from springform pan and place on serving platter. Melt cookie butter in microwave for 20 seconds, and pour or drizzle on top of cheesecake, allowing it to drip down the sides. Sprinkle with crushed cookies.

    Notes

    Do not overmix the batter. This will create air bubbles which can cause the cheesecake to crack.
    Cheesecake cooking time can vary greatly. Begin checking it at 55 minutes, it can take up to 1 hour 20 minutes to fully cook.
    To cut the cheesecake cleanly, run a large knife under hot water and wipe dry before each cut.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 624kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 22g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 165mg | Sodium: 423mg | Potassium: 158mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 1307IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 1mg

    Cherry Chip Cake

    December 20, 2024

    Slice of cherry chip cake on white plate, sitting next to cherry.

    Cherry Chip Cake: This from-scatch recipe uses simple ingredients to make this deliciously moist cake, with bits of cherries in almost every bite. The gorgeous pink frosting is a show-stopper and adds an amazing layer of flavor to the already delicious cake recipe.

    The cake recipes that we have here are not taken lightly! They’re all delicious and we really think you’re also going to love this strawberry crunch cake. Or, if you love icebox cakes, this strawberry cream cheese icebox cake is a

    Slice of cherry chip cake on white plate.

    Cherries are usually in season during the summer but I also believe they’re amazing during Christmas because they can add that beautiful pop of color to dessert recipes. So feel free to use up any extra maraschino cherries in these Chocolate Cherry Cookies or this Fruit Salad with Cool Whip recipe that’s so popular on holiday dessert tables!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    What is Cherry Chip Cake?

    It’s a from-scratch recipe that uses simple ingredients, and special ingredients to help make the recipe moist. The cake has maraschino cherries mixed in to the delicious layers and frosted with a delicious, and gorgeous pink frosting.

    Ingredients Needed for Cake

    Additional cherry chip frosting ingredients below.

    Labeled ingredients on counter for cherry chip cake.
    • Butter – We use unsalted butter for this recipe but if you only have salted butter, it may be best to cut back on the ½ teaspoon of salt.
    • Maraschino cherry juice – This is simply the juice from the jar of cherries.
    • Flour – you’ll want to use all-purpose flour for this recipe.
    • Almond extract – If you need, you can remove this from the recipe if desired but if you can use it, we highly recommend it.

    See the full list of ingredients in the recipe card at the bottom of this post.

    Frosting Ingredients

    Although you may want to use your own frosting, we highly recommend this frosting for its beautiful colors and delicious flavors.

    Ingredients for frosting for cherry chip cake.

    Brands of Ingredients Used:

    You absolutely do not have to use the same brands as we did in this recipe but sometimes it’s helpful to see what was used in case different results are reached and it’s needed for troubleshooting.

    Brands Used:

    • Kroger brand Unsalted Butter
    • C&H Organic Granulated Sugar
    • Chobani Greek Yogurt (non-fat plain)
    • Wilcox Brown Eggs
    • Kirkland Vanilla Extract
    • Simply Organic Almond Extract
    • Great Value Maraschino Cherry Juice
    • Costco Organic Unbleached All-Purpose Flour
    • Bob’s Red Mill Baking Powder
    • Arm and Hammer Baking Soda
    • Kirkland Sea Salt
    • Darigold 2% Milk
    • Great Value Maraschino Cherries
    • Kroger brand Unsalted Butter
    • C&H Powdered Sugar
    • Dairgold Heavy Whipping Cream
    • Rose’s Grenadine

    Substitutions

    You can substitute the Greek Yogurt for your favorite plain yogurt or neutral flavored oil like canola oil, avocado oil, or grapeseed oil.

    Equipment

    • (2) 8’ Round Cake Pans or (3) 6’ Round Cake Pans
    • Stand Mixer
    • Cooling Rack
    • Plastic Wrap
    • Offset Spatula

    How to Make Cherry Chip Cake

    To begin, preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (or 177 degrees C).

    Then, grease and line 2 8” round cake pans or 3 6” round pans (6” pans were used for the photos).

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Steps 1-4 of how to make cherry chip cake batter.

    In the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment, add the butter and sugar. Mix until well combined.

    Add the Greek yogurt, eggs, vanilla extract, almond extract, and cherry juice. Mix until well combined.

    In a separate bowl add the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Stir to combine.

    Alternatively, add a small amount of the flour mixture and then the milk. Continue to alternatively add the flour and milk until it’s all added.

    Cherries in cake batter in mixing bowl.

    Add in the chopped Maraschino Cherries and fold them in so they’re well distributed throughout the cake batter.

    Cake batter in cake pans, and baked cake in cake pans.

    Pour out the cake batter evenly among the prepared cake pans.

    Bake at 350 degrees F (or 177 degrees C) for 30-32 minutes (for 6” round pans) to 32-36 minutes (for 8” pans). Check the cake by putting a toothpick in the middle until it comes out clean.

    Remove them from the oven and allow them to cool for 15 minutes. Then, remove the cakes from the pans and place them on a cooling rack to cool for another 15-30 minutes until cooled completely.

    How to Make the Frosting for Cherry Cake

    While you’re waiting for the cake to cool you can make the frosting.

    Steps 7-10, showing how to frost cherry chip cake.

    In the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment, add the room-temperature butter and 2 cups of powdered sugar. Stir to combine.

    Slowly add the grenadine, whipping cream, salt, and almond extract. Stir to fully combine.

    Slowly add in the rest of the powdered sugar to thicken up the frosting. Add in enough powdered sugar until you gain the consistency you like when decorating a cake.

    Note: ** You will want the frosting to hold its shape but not too stiff that you can’t spread it over the cake.

    To enhance the pink color you can add some additional pink food coloring. **This is completely optional and not used in this recipe. 

    Once fully mixed, transfer the frosting to a piping bag with a round tip. Set aside.

    Preparing the Cake for Frosting

    Level each cake out by slicing the top “dome” off the cake. You can discard this or eat it while decorating.

    How to Frost the Cake

    Top of cherry chip cake with cherries on top.

    Add a small dollop of frosting on to the cake stand. This will help keep your cake in place.

    Place the first cake layer on a cake stand and then pipe some frosting on the cake. Using an offset spatula, even out the frosting so it’s evenly distributed. Place the next layer on top and pipe more frosting on the next layer and then even out the frosting. Repeat this process until you’ve frosted each layer of cake and your cake is fully frosted.

    Side view of tiered, round, cherry chip cake.

    Optional step: Using a star tip, pipe a dollop of frosting on top then place a maraschino cherry on top. Repeat this process 7 more times so you have a total of 8 dollops and 8 cherries. You can also pipe some flowers or shells at the base of the cake for extra decoration.

    Slice of cherry chip cake on white plate, with a fork holding a bite.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • The juice from the jar of Maraschino Cherries is what we used in the cake batter, and we used additional grenadine for the frosting.
    • The almond extract can be omitted but it really does improve the flavor of the cake.
    • The whipping cream gives the frosting a light and fluffy texture. This can be omitted if you want a denser frosting.

    Expert tips and FAQs

    Can I use fresh cherries in this cherry cake recipe?

    While old-fashioned cherry chip cake is traditionally made with maraschino cherries, you can most definitely use fresh chopped cherries as well! You will want to blend some cherries to form a substitute for the cherry juice if you don’t have a can of maraschino cherries on hand and you opt to use fresh instead.

    What other frosting flavors would go well with this cherry chip cake?

    If you feel like there’s enough cherry flavor in this cake without adding cherry frosting too, there are several other options you can try.

    You could try an old-fashioned vanilla frosting.

    If you are looking for something unique, you could try this seven-minute frosting that incorporates egg whites, corn syrup, and sugar to make a fluffy meringue style frosting!

    A chocolate frosting like this fluffy chocolate buttercream would pair nicely with the cherries in this recipe.

    A marshmallow frosting like this one would be a fun one to try with this cake!

    You could also frost this cake with a tangy cream cheese frosting like the one you’ll find in our easy carrot cake recipe.

    Storage

    Store the cake covered at room temperature for 3 days. You can store it covered in the fridge for up to 5 days. When storing it in the fridge, make sure it’s completely covered, the fridge can dry out the cake if it’s not completely covered.

    Related Recipes

    Now that you’ve mastered making a cherry chip cake from scratch, why not try another kind of cake from-scratch like our easy carrot cake recipe or our easy homemade marble cake!

    Or, if a cherry chip fan, these cherry chip cake mix cookies are hard to beat!

    Recipe

    Slice of cherry chip cake on white plate, sitting next to cherry.
    Print Pin
    5 from 17 votes

    Cherry Chip Cake

    Cherry Chip Cake: A from-scratch recipe that has bits of maraschino cherries inside of the cake batter, and it's frosted with a delicious pink frosting.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Frosting Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 slices
    Calories 566kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Cherry Chip Cake

    • ½ cup unsalted butter room temperature (113 g)
    • 1¼ cup sugar (250 g)
    • ¼ cup greek yogurt (70 g)
    • 3 eggs room temperature
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla (5 ml)
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract (5 ml)
    • ½ cup reserved Maraschino cherry juice (118 ml)
    • 2½ cups all purpose flour (300 g)
    • 2 teaspoon baking powder (9.6 g)
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda (2.4 g)
    • ½ teaspoon salt (1 g)
    • 1 cup milk (237 ml)
    • 10 ounce jar of Maraschino cherries chopped, juice drained and reserved for frosting (Save 8 whole cherries for topping)

    Cherry Chip Cake Frosting

    • ½ cup unsalted butter room temperature (113 g)
    • 4-5 cups powdered sugar for desired consistency (448-575 g)
    • 2 Tablespoons heavy whipping cream (27 ml)
    • 3 Tablespoons grenadine (48 ml)
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract (5 ml)
    • ¼ teaspoon salt (0.5 g)
    • pink food coloring optional – not used in the photos you see

    Instructions

    Cherry Chip Cake

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F (or 177 degrees C).
    • Grease and line 2 8” round cake pans or 3 6” round pans (6” pans were used for the photos).
    • In the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment, add the butter and sugar. Mix until well combined.
    • Add the Greek yogurt, eggs, vanilla extract, almond extract, and cherry juice. Mix until well combined.
    • In a separate bowl add the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Stir to combine.
    • Alternatively, add a small amount of the flour mixture and then the milk. Continue to alternatively add the flour and milk until it’s all added.
    • Add in the chopped Maraschino Cherries and fold them in so they’re well distributed throughout the cake batter.
    • Pour out the cake batter evenly among the prepared cake pans.
    • Bake at 350 degrees F (or 177 degrees C) for 30-32 minutes (for 6” round pans) to 32-36 minutes (for 8” pans). Check the cake by putting a toothpick in the middle until it comes out clean.
    • Remove them from the oven and allow them to cool for 15 minutes. Then, remove the cakes from the pans and place them on a cooling rack to cool for another 15-30 minutes until cooled completely.

    Cherry Frosting

    • While you’re waiting for the cake to cool you can make the frosting.
    • In the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment, add the room-temperature butter and 2 cups of powdered sugar. Stir to combine.
    • Slowly add the grenadine, whipping cream, salt, and almond extract. Stir to fully combine.
    • Slowly add in the rest of the powdered sugar to thicken up the frosting. Add in enough powdered sugar until you gain the consistency you like when decorating a cake. **You will want the frosting to hold its shape but not too stiff that you can’t spread it over the cake.
    • NOTE: To enhance the pink color you can add some additional pink food coloring. **This is completely optional and not used in the recipe featured.
      Once fully mixed, transfer the frosting to a piping bag with a round tip. Set aside.

    Preparing the Cakes for Decorating

    • Level each cake out by slicing the top “dome” off the cake. You can discard this or eat it while decorating.

    Frosting the Cake

    • Add a small dollop of frosting on to the cake stand. This will help keep your cake in place.
    • Place the first cake layer on a cake stand and then pipe some frosting on the cake. Using an offset spatula, even out the frosting so it’s evenly distributed.
    • Place the next layer on top and pipe more frosting on the next layer and then even out the frosting. Repeat this process until you’ve frosted each layer of cake and your cake is fully frosted.
    • Optional step: Using a star tip, pipe a dollop of frosting on top then place a maraschino cherry on top. Repeat this process 7 more times so you have a total of 8 dollops and 8 cherries. You can also pipe some flowers or shells at the base of the cake for extra decoration.

    Notes

    Best practices:
      • Do not frost the cake while it’s warm, the warm cake will melt the frosting.
      • Try to add between ¼” to ½” of frosting between each layer. 
      • Cutting the “dome” off the top of the cake will help create a layer cake that doesn’t lean and stands straight.
      • When measuring out the flour you can either weigh the flour (for exact measurement) or spoon the flour into the measuring cup then level out the flour. Avoid dipping the measuring cup into the flour so you don’t use too much flour.
      • When frosting the cake you can add a thin layer on the sides of the cake called a crumb coat, then chill the cake and add another layer of frosting this will give you a clean frosting look without any crumbs being added to the cake.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 566kcal | Carbohydrates: 97g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 224mg | Potassium: 180mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 74g | Vitamin A: 613IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 2mg

    Grilled Shrimp Recipe and Marinade

    December 17, 2024

    grilled shrimp in white bowl

    Grilled Shrimp: This shrimp marinade is perfect for grilling or sautéing, to serve on chicken street tacos, pasta, side salad, kabobs, even eating alone, for a healthy main course that the whole family will love!

    Not only will you find an easy marinade below, but you’ll also get the instructions on how to grill shrimp too! Now you may also love using this egg wash for fried shrimp, to make a fried battered shrimp!

    shrimp marinade - for grilling - shrimp in white bowl
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Hey my Fantabulosity friends! It’s Meg popping in again with a delicious and ridiculously simple recipe for you to try!

    Shrimp Marinade Recipe

    I wanted to create a shrimp marinade with a ton of flavor using ingredients that you would already have right in your pantry and refrigerator, that you could easily prep for Marinate Monday in the Dinner Theme System, or any night of the week. My philosophy has always been finding ways to use our common, everyday ingredients in ways that will wow your family and friends.

    So, there’s nothing crazy or obscure in this recipe but I promise it is the best shrimp!

    What do you soak shrimp in?

    Soaking shrimp in a marinade is ideal! For this recipe, you’ll use ingredients such as Worcestershire sauce, vinegar, olive oil, mustard, garlic, salt, and pepper.

    What is the best way to season shrimp?

    We feel like the best way to season shrimp is with the marinade. But extra spices may be something you’re interested in sprinkling on, just before grilling/cooking. Such as, garlic powder, salt, pepper, Italian seasoning, seasoned salt, etc.

    How long should you marinate shrimp?

    30 minutes to an hour.

    Should you marinate shrimp overnight?

    I wouldn’t. If you marinate it longer than an hour, that it can actually start to cook the shrimp.

    Ingredient Checklist

    Let’s talk about the simple ingredients that go into this shrimp marinade. Like a lot of marinades, extra-virgin olive oil and vinegar are the base ingredients that keep things saucy. Another oil could be used here in place of the olive oil if you wish.

    Worcestershire brings lots of deep, rich flavor and standard yellow mustard adds a delicious tang to the marinade. Because everything is better with fresh garlic, a clove is mixed in to punch up the flavor even more.

    ingredients for shrimp marinade

    How to Marinate Shrimp

    In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, vinegar, Worcestershire sauce, mustard, salt, black pepper, and garlic. Pour into a zip-top bag. Add shrimp, seal, and shake around to ensure the shrimp is coated.

    Shrimp marinade ingredients in a bowl.
    Pour marinade ingredients in a bowl.

    How Long to Marinate Shrimp

    Shrimp, and any seafood, in general, do not need much time in a marinade to soak up the flavors.

    In fact, if it sits in the marinade too long the acidic vinegar can start to essentially cook the shrimp which will mess with the texture in all the wrong ways. That’s something we want to actively avoid.

    Lucky for us, that means this shrimp only needs to marinate for an hour. You could even get away with just 30 minutes too if you’re in a hurry. Fresh shrimp (raw shrimp) is ideal but if you have frozen shrimp, it’s best to thaw it out before marinating or put it in the marinade, frozen, and leave it in a little longer than an hour so it has time to soak in.

    Shrimp marinating in ziploc bag

    Quick Appetizer or Easy Dinner Idea

    Because you only need up to an hour to marinate this recipe is a perfect weeknight meal or even as an easy party appetizer. Especially considering that once the marinating time is up, you’ll only need 4 minutes, YES JUST 4, to grill the shrimp and have it on the table.

    That means while the shrimp is soaking up this delicious marinade you can whip up some rice and roast some vegetables for a wonderful side dish for the best grilled shrimp too!

    How to Grill Marinated Shrimp

    raw shrimp on skewers for kabobs

    You can absolutely cook the shrimp any way you wish. (Air fryer, stove top, pan fry, cast iron pan, etc.) But if you’re planning on grilling shrimp on an outdoor grill, it may be best to put the uncooked shrimp on skewers and serve as shrimp kabobs. (If using wooden skewers, don’t forget to soak them before grilling!)

    Or, you can use a grill basket or tray to make things even easier!

    Cooked shrimp on a grill.

    How to Grill Shrimp

    • Preheat a grill or grill pan over medium heat.
    • Place shrimp on grill grates for 2 minutes per side.

    Note: For best results, if you are using an outdoor grill, it would be helpful if you put the shrimp on skewers to keep them from falling down the grates.

    If desired, sprinkle with fresh parsley or your favorite fresh herbs on top of the grilled shrimp skewers.

    Marinated grilled shrimp kabobs

    How to Store Leftover Shrimp

    If you happen to have leftover shrimp after cooking, store in an airtight container for 3 to 4 days!

    Start the new year off right with this simple and healthy Grilled Marinated Shrimp. Staple ingredients make up this shrimp marinade, perfect for weeknights.

    It would be a perfect option for meal prepping for lunches throughout the week if that’s your thing. I’m trying my hardest to make it my thing but it’s hard to keep on it consistently.

    Versatile Shrimp Marinade

    Although this marinade is the delicious on shrimp, it would be just as delicious with roasted pork tenderloin, smoked chicken tenders, and other seafood. I’m betting it would be great as a simple salad dressing too (just make sure you use it solely on a salad for that batch, nobody wants a foodborne illness).

    Whether you’re looking for something healthy, something simple for weeknights or a main dish the whole family will adore, I’ve got you covered with this Grilled Marinated Shrimp recipe.

    Start the new year off right with this simple and healthy Grilled Marinated Shrimp. Staple ingredients make up this shrimp marinade, perfect for weeknights.

    What to Serve with Grilled Shrimp

    Since the grill is already heated up and ready, it’s a great idea to cook vegetables on the grill too! They pair wonderfully with a recipe like this grilled shrimp.

    Or, you can also make this boom shrimp sauce to go along with grilled shrimp! To keep the seafood theme going, this mussels recipe in a white wine sauce is easy to make and such a great appetizer.

    More Easy Shrimp Recipes You’ll Love

    We love easy recipes around here, and if you love shrimp, then you don’t want to miss this easy fried shrimp recipe, this loaded shrimp potato, and this air fryer fried shrimp recipe!

    Or, for a fun twist on shrimp, try these shrimp burgers!

    Recipe

    grilled shrimp in white bowl
    Print Pin
    4.44 from 30 votes

    Grilled Shrimp Recipe and Marinade

    This grilled shrimp recipe and marinade that's made with everyday ingredients like mustard, Worcestershire sauce, vinegar, and garlic makes things easy! Plus, grilling instructions!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 1 hour hour
    Cook Time 4 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 4 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 443kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • ⅔ cup olive oil
    • ¼ cup vinegar (white, red wine, apple cider)
    • 1 ½ tablespoons Worcestershire sauce
    • 1 tablespoon yellow mustard
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 clove garlic, finely minced
    • 1 pound 41/50 shrimp, raw, peeled and deveined

    Instructions

    • In a bowl, whisk together the olive oil, vinegar, Worcestershire sauce, mustard, salt, pepper and garlic. Pour into a zip top bag.
      Add shrimp, seal and shake around to ensure the shrimp is coated.
      Marinate in the refrigerator for an hour.
    • Preheat a grill or grill pan over medium heat. Grill shrimp for 2 minutes per side.
      Note: If you are using an outdoor grill, it would be helpful if you put the shrimp on skewers to keep them from falling down the grates.

    Notes

    Tip for Grilling: If using wooden skewers, soak them in water before assembling them so they don’t burn.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 443kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 285mg | Sodium: 1217mg | Potassium: 135mg | Vitamin C: 5.6mg | Calcium: 170mg | Iron: 3mg

    Egg Custard

    December 16, 2024

    Egg custard slice on white plate.

    Egg Custard: This recipe for egg custard is a delicious and easy pie that’s perfect for any holiday! It uses basic ingredients which makes a delicious, yet simple dessert, and only takes 35 minutes to bake.

    Slice of egg custard on white plate.

    I don’t know about you, but I think pies are the perfect comfort food. Next time you need a pick-me-up dessert recipe, I suggest making one of our favorite pies along with this custard! Peanut butter pie, pecan pie, and mini no-bake pies are great recipes to boost your spirit.

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe:

    • From Scratch: This classic dessert recipe is so easy to make from scratch. Using only basic ingredients, you can make this great recipe in under an hour!
    • Texture: The texture of this egg custard pie recipe is similar to my buttermilk pie. It’s a light and creamy texture that will satisfy your sweet tooth but won’t leave you with that heavy feeling.
    • Holidays & Parties: Like most pies and cakes, this homemade egg custard is the perfect party dessert or delicious to serve after Thanksgiving dinner especially! You’re able to make a large number of yummy servings in a short amount of time. A win-win!
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients Needed

    Make sure to scroll to the bottom of the post if you’re looking for the recipe card with ingredient measurements and directions for this traditional egg custard!

    • Eggs – whole eggs, meaning egg yolks and egg whites, plus one additional egg white is optional – see below.)
    • Sugar – white, granulated sugar
    • Salt – table salt works for this
    • Nutmeg – ground spice that you should be able to find in the spice aisle
    • Whole milk – this is preferred over other types of milk. See in the FAQs below.
    • Vanilla extract – pure vanilla extract is so much better than imitation vanilla but that will work too.
    • Unbaked pie crust – for this recipe, you can make this pie crust recipe or you can buy a storebought pie crust but the sizing works perfectly and is very easy to use. Note: Most store-bought crusts come with two pie crusts, however, you’ll only need to use one for this recipe. You will place one pie crust, in a 9-in pie plate, preferably glass but metal is ok too. You can use the extra crust to make many of these other pie recipes.
    • Egg white – this is optional, to brush on the store-bought pie crust (or homemade crust) before filling to help prevent it from getting soggy.
    Labeled ingredients for egg custard.

    Step-by-Step Directions

    1. Preheat oven to 350 degrees f.
    2. In a large bowl, beat eggs lightly. Add sugar, salt, nutmeg, vanilla, and milk beat well to make the custard mixture (See image below). (This mixture is similar to our top favorite recipe, bread pudding.)
    Milk, sugar and vanilla in mixing bowl for egg custard.
    1. Place raw pie crust in to pie dish (normally a 9-inch pie pan).
    Uncooked pie crust in pie plate.
    1. Gently press pie dough in to the pie plate, on the sides, and on the bottom, trying to keep the pie crust centered.
    2. Take the top edges and gently pinch the edges “up” so it forms a small “lip” to where it can act as a “wall” for the egg custard batter to stay inside. See image below. (Note: it doesn’t have to be perfect.)
    Pie crust with pretty, pressed edges.
    Pinch top edges so it forms a small “lip” which will help prevent batter from splashing out.
    1. Optional: To help prevent a soggy crust, whisk one egg white in a small bowl and brush on to the sides and bottom of crust. I do this and prefer it.

      Blind Bake: You may also choose to blind bake the pie crust but we don’t for this recipe, since it turns out perfect each time without doing so.
    Pastry brush, spreading egg white on crust.
    Optional but recommended: brush crust with egg whites
    1. Pour custard filling into pie crust. (See tips below on how to do this step with ease!)

    Pro Cooking Tip:

    Pouring the custard mixture in to the pie crust can get messy if you pour and walk to the oven. (The batter is very thin so it can swoosh out if not careful.)

    To avoid spillage, here are tips for best results:

    1. Place a rimmed baking sheet on the bottom rack of the oven. (This will catch any spills or an accidental overage.)
    2. Place just the pie crust/pie plate in the oven, on the middle rack.
    3. Pull the middle rack toward you, just enough for the next step.
    4. Pour mixture in to a pitcher and pour the batter in to the crust while it’s in the oven.
    5. Carefully slide the oven rack back in to the oven, being careful not to splash the batter out of the pie shell.

    Cooking Time:

    1. Bake for 35 minutes at 350° or until a knife inserted in the middle comes out clean, and you see the top slightly golden brown.
    Cooked egg custard in pie plate on wooden cutting board.
    1. Let the custard cool on a wire wrack.
    2. When cool, place in refrigerator. Best served chilled.
    Sliced of egg custard on white plate sitting next to fork.

    Expert Tips and FAQs

    Do you have to refrigerate egg custard pie?

    Yes. This egg custard recipe needs to be refrigerated. In fact, custard-based pies should not be left at room temperature for more than two hours. You can store this creamy pie in an airtight container, or cover with plastic wrap, in the fridge for up to 4 days.

    How do you make egg custard pie from scratch?

    It’s actually very simple! This egg custard pie recipe is made from scratch (except the crust) and you only need basic ingredients. There’s nothing better than the satisfaction of making something from scratch… even if it is easy!

    How do you keep a custard pie from getting watery?

    Custard pies may become watery if the eggs are not cooked all the way or evenly distributed over the mixture. To prevent this, make sure you beat your egg mixture very well and bake for as long as needed.

    Should you serve custard pie chilled?

    Yes! Creamy custard pie tastes best when it’s served cold. Serving this pie at room temperature may cause the texture to change. To keep this pie cold at a summer party, I would recommend putting it on ice.

    What type of milk is best for old-fashioned custard pie?

    I recommend using whole milk. Whole milk is thicker and going to add more texture than other types of milk. I would not recommend using a plant-based milk for this egg custard recipe because it may alter the taste.

    Slice of egg custard on white plate with bite taken out of it.

    What to Serve on Top of Egg Custard

    Honestly, we feel this is delicious all by itself, however, if you’re looking to dress it up, or serve something along with it, here are some suggestions that will help:

    • whipped cream
    • fresh berries
    • ice cream

    More Dessert Recipes

    As far as dessert recipes go, I have too many favorites. Baking quick but delicious desserts is the best way to do it in my opinion; from homemade pies to brownie recipes, cupcake recipes, and classic cookie recipes.

    My boys have been loving my strawberry brownies and this peach mango pie is absolutely amazing but I also love this lemon bundt cake recipe! There are so many options but you can’t go wrong with any of them!

    Recipe

    Egg custard slice on white plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 14 votes

    Egg Custard

    This recipe for egg custard is a delicious and easy pie that's perfect for any holiday! It uses basic ingredients which makes a delicious, yet simple dessert, and only takes 35 minutes to bake.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 slices
    Calories 256kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 eggs
    • ½ cup white sugar
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon nutmeg
    • 2 ⅔ cups milk
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 refrigerated pie crust (Unbaked) Homemade Pie Crust or storebought
    • 1 egg white optional but recommended

    Instructions

    • Pie Crust: Let 1 refrigerated pie crust come to room temperature.
    • Prep Oven: Preheat oven to 350 degrees f.
    • Mix: In a mixing bowl, beat 3 eggs lightly. Add ½ cup sugar, ½ teaspoon salt, ½ teaspoon nutmeg, 1 teaspoon vanilla, and 2 & ⅔ cups milk, and beat well.
    • Pie Crust Placement: Unroll pie crust and place in a 9-inch pie plate (glass pie plate recommended). Press sides and bottom so it fits nicely in to the pie plate. Try to make the pie crust even and form the rim of the pie crust "up" to almost create small sides so egg custard does not overflow.
    • Optional but recommended: take the whites of an egg, and put in a small bowl. Gently whisk with a fork. Using a basting brush, brush on the egg whites on to the pie crust. This will help prevent a soggy crust.
    • Pour: Pour egg custard batter in to pie crust. (See notes for tips on how to safely do this for best results.)
    • Bake: Bake for 35 minutes or until a knife inserted in the middle comes out clean. NOTE: if the pie crust starts to burn, before custard is done, you can cover with aluminum foil to prevent burning. However, this isn't something we've had to do.
    •  Cool: Let cool on a wire rack and chill in the refrigerator before serving.

    Notes

    What size pie crust do you use for an egg custard recipe?
    You will place one pie crust, in a 9-in pie plate, preferably glass but metal is ok too.
    TIP: To avoid spillage, here are tips for best results:
    Pouring the egg custard batter in to the pie crust can get messy if you pour and walk to the oven. (The batter is very thin so it can swoosh out if not careful.)
    1. Place a rimmed cookie sheet on the bottom rack of the oven. (This will catch any spills or an accidental overage.)
    2. Place just the pie crust/pie plate in the oven, on the middle rack.
    3. Pull the middle rack toward you, just enough for the next step.
    4. Pour egg custard batter in to a pitcher and pour the batter in to the crust while it’s in the oven.
    5. Carefully slide the oven rack back in to the oven, being careful not to splash the batter out of the pie shell.
    Do you have to refrigerate egg custard pie? 
    Yes. This egg custard recipe needs to be refrigerated. 
    How do you keep a custard pie from getting watery? 
    Custard pies may become watery if the eggs are not cooked all the way or evenly distributed over the mixture. To prevent this, make sure you beat your egg mixture very well and bake for as long as needed.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 256kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 304mg | Potassium: 157mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 221IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 107mg | Iron: 1mg

    Easy Chicken Pot Pie Recipe

    December 15, 2024

    Homemade Chicken Pot Pie in white pie dish, with a peek at the veggies and chicken.

    This easy chicken pot pie recipe is a classic that will become a favorite for the whole family! Keep things simple by using a rotisserie chicken and store-bought pie crust if you wish, and let the flavors SHINE!

    Slice of chicken pot pie, showing the inside of the chicken and the vegetables with the crust, on white plate.

    In just one hour, you’ll have a flavorful chicken pot pie filling that sits between a golden brown top crust and bottom crust, which will have you saying this is the best chicken pot pie recipe!

    This is only one of the easy recipes I recommend adding to your Dinner Theme Night System that helps you plan dinner easily!

    Featured Comment:
    “I have tried a few different chicken pot pie recipes. This is THE BEST! It is a perfect balance of ingredients! … YUMMY!” – Linda S.

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    This chicken pot pie recipe will take you back to Grandma’s kitchen, just like my bread pudding recipe!

    From the flaky, golden top crust from the egg wash, to the filling that uses traditional vegetables such as peas and carrots, the flavors will seem so familiar, similar to what I use in our chicken pot pie casserole.

    This easy chicken pot pie recipe is not only delicious, classic comfort food but it’s easy enough for a weeknight dinner recipe or a hearty Sunday dinner with family.

    Homemade or Store Bought Pie Crust for Chicken Pot Pie?

    I kept this recipe on the easier side, by using a store-bought pie crust. However, you can use your favorite flaky pie crust recipe, or my homemade pie crust recipe.

    So no worries if the thought of making a pot pie from total scratch, seemed like too much. Storebought will work just fine!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Pot Pie Recipe Ingredients

    If you’d like, you can change things up when it comes to an easy chicken pot pie recipe by making it easier, making it more from scratch, or simply adding different variations to the filling.

    However, as written, this is the traditional way I remember the old-fashioned chicken pot pie recipe.

    Labeled ingredients for chicken pot pie recipe.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    • Pie Crust: If using a store-bought pie crust, make sure to grab the box that has 2 crusts inside of it and take a look at what oven temperature is recommended, so you know what to preheat the oven to, for a “double crust” recipe.
    • Chicken: What I love so much about this recipe is that the cooked chicken can be made in so many different ways. From using a storebought rotisserie chicken to making shredded chicken in the Crock Pot, or simply boiling chicken breasts to shred. Have leftovers from this turkey breast recipe? You can use that instead of chicken!
    • Vegetables: Frozen peas and carrots or frozen mixed veggies are great to keep on hand in the freezer for this recipe. However, you can use fresh veggies or even canned mixed vegetables but just make sure to drain the can! You may also choose to use other vegetables such as green beans, mushrooms, or corn in this recipe.
    • Butter: Unsalted butter is suggested but if you only have salted butter, it may be best to lighten up on the salt measurement in this recipe so it doesn’t turn out too salty.
    • Spices & Seasonings: Feel free to experiment here with fresh herbs, such as rosemary, parsley, and sage.
    • Sweet onion: Sweet onions contribute a mellow and mildly sweet flavor to the pot pie filling, enhancing its overall taste without overpowering other ingredients.
    • Flour: You’ll want to use all-purpose flour to create a roux, helping to thicken the pot pie filling and make a smooth, velvety consistency.
    • Chicken broth: Chicken broth serves as the flavorful liquid base for the filling, infusing the pot pie with a rich and savory taste. Tip: Use a rotisserie chicken for the pot pie, and make a rotisserie chicken broth too! Or, this homemade chicken broth is a great recipe to come up with the broth too.
    • Half and half milk: Half and half adds a creamy and velvety texture to the filling, enriching the pot pie with a luxurious flavor profile.  
    • Egg and water: An egg and water are used for an egg wash on the pie crust, providing a glossy finish and golden brown color when baked.

    How to Make This Easy Chicken Pot Pie

    In only one hour, following the steps and ingredients mentioned, you’ll have a hot and ready dinner for your family.

    Process steps showing how to make chicken pot pie.
    1. Preheat your oven to the temperature specified on the pie crust packaging. Our was 425°F for a double-crust pot pie. 
    2. In a large skillet, melt the butter over medium heat. Add ½ cup diced onions and ½ cup diced celery, and cook until they are softened. Stir in the ⅓ cup all-purpose flour, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ½ teaspoon ground black pepper, ½ teaspoon granulated garlic, ½ teaspoon onion powder and ½ teaspoon dried thyme, creating a roux. Cook for 1 – 2 minutes until the mixture becomes golden brown. Do not overcook or burn. 
    3. Gradually whisk in 1 ¾ cups reduced-sodium chicken broth and ⅔ cup half-and-half, making sure to eliminate any lumps. Cook and stir until the mixture thickens, usually around 5 – 7 minutes.

    Tip: Adjust the thickness of the filling by adding more or less flour and adjusting the cooking time. The goal is to achieve a creamy and well-cooked filling.

    1. Add 1 cup of frozen peas and carrots mix to the skillet, followed by 3 cups of cooked chicken. Stir until all the ingredients are well combined and heated through.
    2. Roll out one of the pre-made pie crusts and place it into the bottom of a 9-inch pie dish. Pour the chicken and vegetable filling into the pie crust.
    Top crust added on top of chicken pot pie.
    1. Roll out the second pie crust and place it over the filling. Seal the edges by crimping them together. Cut a few slits on the top crust to allow steam to escape during baking.
      Whisk together 1 egg and 1 tablespoon of water.
      Brush the top crust with the egg wash for a golden finish.
      Cover the edges of the crust with strips of aluminum foil to protect the crust from being too brown.
      Remove the foil after 20 minutes in the oven.
    Baked chicken pot pie, showing the crust on top of the pie.
    1. Bake in the preheated oven for 35 – 40 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F, the crust is golden brown, and the filling is bubbling.
    2. Allow the chicken pot pie to cool for a few minutes on a cooling rack before serving. Serve!

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Eggwash: Brushing the top crust with a beaten egg before baking gives it a beautiful golden color. This step is optional but adds a nice finishing touch.
    • Different Pie Crusts: Feel free to experiment with different types of pie crusts, such as puff pastry or whole wheat crusts, based on your preferences.
    Slice of chicken pot pie cut out of pie, showing the vegetables and the chicken.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is chicken pot pie filling made of?

    Chicken pot pie filling is made of a combination of a few different ingredients such as vegetables, chicken, half and half, chicken broth, and flour that creates a roux for a thicker filling.

    How do you keep the bottom crust of chicken pot pie from getting soggy?

    Although it’s not required, you may also brush the bottom crust with an eggwash mixture before pouring in the filling, to help prevent the bottom crust from getting soggy.

    What to Serve with Chicken Pot Pie

    Chicken pot pie is often a complete meal, but you can serve it with a side salad or additional vegetables such as a can of green beans or easy cheddar biscuits, for a well-rounded dinner.

    Storage

    • Refrigeration: If your chicken pot pie is freshly made and you plan to consume it within a few days, store it in the refrigerator. Allow the chicken pot pie to cool to room temperature before placing it in the fridge to prevent condensation, which can make the crust soggy. Wrap the pot pie tightly with plastic wrap or aluminum foil to keep it airtight and prevent it from drying out.
    • Freezing: If you want to store the chicken pot pie for a more extended period, consider freezing it. Let the pot pie cool to room temperature before freezing to avoid moisture buildup. Wrap the pot pie securely in plastic wrap or aluminum foil, and then place it in a resealable plastic freezer bag or an airtight container. Label the container with the date to keep track of its freshness.
    • Serving-size portions: Consider dividing the chicken pot pie into individual servings before refrigerating or freezing. This makes it easier to reheat only what you need without affecting the entire pie.
    • Reheating: When you’re ready to enjoy the chicken pot pie, preheat your oven to around 350°F. If the pot pie is frozen, allow it to thaw in the refrigerator overnight before reheating. Reheat the pot pie in the oven until the internal temperature reaches 165°F to ensure it’s safe to eat. Cover the edges of the crust with foil if they start to brown too much during reheating.

    Related Recipes

    If you love this classic pot pie recipe, then you’ll also love this old-fashioned chicken and rice casserole, this ham and beans recipe, and this old-fashioned tuna casserole.

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Homemade Chicken Pot Pie in white pie dish, with a peek at the veggies and chicken.
    Print Pin
    4.91 from 10 votes

    Easy Chicken Pot Pie Recipe

    A classic, EASY chicken pot pie recipe made easy and that's full of flavor. Peas, carrots, celery, onions, all in a creamy filling between a golden pie crust.
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 25 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 625kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter
    • ½ cup sweet onion finely chopped
    • ½ cup celery finely chopped
    • ⅓ cup all-purpose flour
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon onion powder
    • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
    • 1¾ cups chicken broth
    • ⅔ cup half and half
    • 1 cup frozen peas and carrots mix
    • 3 cups cooked chicken shredded chicken or cubed
    • 2 refrigerated pie crusts 14.1 ounce box or make this homemade pie crust
    • 1 tablespoon water  purified would be best!
    • 1 large egg beaten

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to the temperature specified on the pie crust packaging. Our was 425°F for a double-crust pot pie. 
    • In a large skillet, melt the butter over medium heat. Add ½ cup diced onions and ½ cup diced celery, and cook until they are softened.
      Stir in the ⅓ cup all-purpose flour, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ½ teaspoon ground black pepper, ½ teaspoon granulated garlic, ½ teaspoon onion powder and ½ teaspoon dried thyme, creating a roux.
      Cook for 1 – 2 minutes until the mixture becomes golden brown. Do not overcook or burn. 
    • Gradually whisk in 1 ¾ cups reduced-sodium chicken broth and ⅔ cup half-and-half, making sure to eliminate any lumps.
      Cook and stir until the mixture thickens, usually around 5 – 7 minutes.
    • Add 1 cup of frozen peas and carrots mix to the skillet, followed by 3 cups of cooked chicken.
      Stir until all the ingredients are well combined and heated through.
    • Roll out one of the pre-made pie crusts and place it into the bottom of a 9-inch pie dish.
      Pour the chicken and vegetable filling into the pie crust.
    • Roll out the second pie crust and place it over the filling. Seal the edges by crimping them together.
      Cut a few slits on the top crust to allow steam to escape during baking.
      Whisk together 1 egg and 1 tablespoon of water. Brush the top crust with the egg wash for a golden finish.
      Cover the edges of the crust with strips of aluminum foil to protect the crust from being too brown. Remove the foil after 20 minutes in the oven.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for 35 – 40 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165°F, and the crust is golden brown, and the filling is bubbling.
    • Allow to cool for a few minutes on a cooling rack before serving. Serve!

    Video

    Notes

    Tips for Recipe Success:
    • Soggy Crust: Although this recipe is delicious without it, you may choose to brush an eggwash on the bottom crust before filling as well, to help prevent the bottom crust from getting soggy.
    • Time-Saving Tip: Using a store-bought rotisserie chicken is a time-saving shortcut. 
    • Other Seasonings: The recipe calls for dried thyme, but you can add other herbs like rosemary, parsley, or sage for additional flavor.
    • More Vegetables: Feel free to add different types of vegetables if you prefer.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 625kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 124mg | Sodium: 826mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 2103IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 79mg | Iron: 4mg

    How to Cook Steak in the Oven

    December 11, 2024

    Oven Baked Steak with Butter and a side of potatoes

    How to Cook Steak: An oven-baked steak recipe that is melt in your mouth goodness, that’s easy to make and only takes a few minutes!

    Cooking a steak in the oven with butter, salt, and pepper makes this one of the easiest and BEST steak recipes EVER! Then, after this recipe, if you love a good southern, fried recipe, you’ll want to try this country-fried steak recipe, too!

    Sliced oven baked steak with butter on top

    The BEST Way to Cook Steak in the Oven

    If you’ve ever had a steak, cooking it on the grill can be delicious. (We feel the same way about pork steak recipes.) However, the best way for cooking a steak is by searing it on the stovetop and then baking it in the oven!

    Here’s the recipe that you’ll never stray from once you make it!

    More Easy Steak Recipes:

    If you love cooking steaks or feel intimidated by it, then you’re going to love the other steak recipes here on the blog because they’re super easy and super flavorful!

    The BEST Steak Bites are a huge family favorite, and these BBQ Pork Steaks in the Slow Cooker are so easy for a dump-and-go recipe!

    Now if you have venison steak in the freezer, don’t miss this Deer Steak on the Stovetop and this Grilled Deer Steak Recipe.

    Large ribeye steaks in cast iron pan

    Ingredients and Types of Steak

    You can jump to the recipe card below for all of the ingredients and instructions all in one place.

    For this oven steak recipe, I used two thick-cut ribeye steaks. (Almost an inch thick, although you don’t HAVE to have steaks this same thickness.) You don’t have to use ribeye for this steak recipe either.

    Feel free to use sirloin, NY strips, t-bone, porterhouse, or any cut you like!

    Ingredients for steak cooked in the oven

    Seasonings for Steak:

    For seasoning, I only use salt and pepper. Now, when I say “salt and pepper,” in any of my recipes, you can go ahead and count on that I mean kosher salt and this cracked peppercorn medley.

    It is the most DELICIOUS combo of seasonings on a steak.

    Now don’t get me wrong. I love a good garlic pepper, lemon pepper, or any other seasoning for that matter… but it’s hard to beat a steak covered in kosher salt and peppercorn. Combine that with browned butter, and it’s game over with my taste buds. It’s the BEST.

    How to Cook Steak in the Oven

    Make sure to scroll to the bottom of this post to see the full recipe card with step-by-step instructions!

    Ribeye Steaks on cutting board with salt and pepper sprinkled on them

    You can salt and pepper your steaks, according to your taste.

    For these two, I used a total of about a tablespoon of kosher salt and a teaspoon of peppercorn to season both.

    Butter melting in cast iron skillet
    Melt butter
    Butter browning in cast iron skillet
    Allow butter to brown

    How to Brown Butter

    Place butter in a skillet that is on medium-high heat. Allow the butter to heat, stirring occasionally, until the butter has turned brown. Stirring it helps the butter brown evenly. Watch for the butter to turn brown, and then add the seasoned steaks.

    Pro Tip: You don’t want the butter to burn, so have the steaks ready before browning the butter.

    Sear the Steaks

    Once the butter has browned, add the steaks to the hot skillet and sear for one minute on each side, and then place it in to the oven.

    Raw seasoned steaks in cast iron skillet
    Sear the steaks
    Steaks have been seared in cast iron
    Sear other side

    How Long to Cook Steak in Oven

    The steak will only need 3 minutes in the oven after searing, and it will come out sizzling and smelling like you’re in a delicious steakhouse! If using a cast iron, go ahead and slip the whole pan in the oven.

    Just soak in that sizzle sound and heavenly smell during this process!

    Baked steak in cast iron skillet

    Baked Steak

    Within minutes, you have a baked steak that’s ready to devour, and if this is your first time cooking a steak… congratulations!

    Butter melting on steak that was cooked in oven

    Compound Butter for Steak

    Although optional, compound butter can be delicious on top of your oven-baked steak! Check out these flavored butter recipes to pick one that you’d love on top!

    Popular Steak Questions:

    How do you cook the perfect steak?

    The secret is to keep it simple, use butter, simple spices, sear and broil it in the oven for a few minutes! It turns out to be the perfect steak every time!

    How do you make steak flavorful?

    Browned butter adds more flavor than you think it would. The combination of browned butter with kosher salt and peppercorn medley creates a steakhouse flavor that does NOT require steak sauce!

    Is it better to cook steak on the stove or in the oven?

    Both! You wouldn’t think it would make that big of a difference, but it really does. The pan-searing on the stove gives the browned flavor you love and the really hot oven helps cook the steak through!

    Sliced, cooked steaks that were baked in the oven

    Sides for Steak

    Now, of course, there are many options for steak sides, but there is an absolute favorite. This side salad for steak is the best. (Seriously, it has almost 500 reviews).

    We love having roasted garlic broccoli and these easy yeast rolls for beginners to complete this dinner but there are a lot of easy side dish recipes to choose from!

    More Easy Beef Dinner Recipes!

    If you have a freezer full of beef or need quick and easy dinner ideas, you’ll also love these cheeseburger sliders. They’re a family favorite, and super easy to make in the oven!

    Or, if you love slow cooker recipes, these slow cooker cube steaks are so easy to make and are so delicious!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Oven Baked Steak with Butter and a side of potatoes
    Print Pin
    4.65 from 159 votes

    How to Cook Steak in the Oven

    Steak in the Oven: Cooking with browned butter in a cast iron skillet, baked for only minutes, and coated in cracked peppercorn and kosher salt, is ALL this ribeye needed!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 2 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 7 minutes minutes
    Servings 2 steaks
    Calories 570kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 Ribeye Steaks
    • 2 tablespoons Salted Butter
    • 1 tablespoon Kosher Salt or to taste
    • ½ tablespoon Cracked Peppercorn Medley or to taste

    Instructions

    • For a "Medium" Steak – Preheat oven to 475 degrees before you even start to season your steaks.
    • Coat your steaks with salt and pepper, on both sides.
    • Over medium to high heat, melt the butter in an oven proof skillet.
    • When the butter is melted and has turned a golden brown, place the steaks into the skillet. Let them sear for about 1 minute (less if you prefer more of a rarer steak, and if thinner than 1-in. thickness.)
    • Flip and let sear on other side for the same amount of time.
    • Place skillet in the oven for about 3 minutes.
    • Remove steak from skillet (or it will continue to cook) and place on a cutting board. Allow the steak to rest for 1-2 minutes to trap the juices inside, and then serve.

    Video

    Notes

    The amount of salt and pepper to use can vary depending on your preference. Remember, you can always add the salt but you can’t take it away. 
    Tip: Sprinkling salt on after the steak has cooked and is resting, can provide a great flavor!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1steak | Calories: 570kcal | Protein: 45g | Fat: 43g | Saturated Fat: 21g | Cholesterol: 167mg | Sodium: 217mg | Potassium: 605mg | Vitamin A: 385IU | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 3.9mg

    The BEST Oreo Dessert

    December 9, 2024

    Slice of no bake Oreo dessert on plate.

    This no-bake Oreo dessert recipe, made with simple ingredients such as Oreo Cookies, Cool Whip, pudding mix, and cream cheese makes this a delicious and easy sweet treat, and is one of our most popular no-bake dessert recipes.

    With only a 20-minute prep time, 7 ingredients, and a 2-hour chill time – this dessert is perfect for a potluck or to make on a weekend for an easy Oreo dessert the kids will love!

    Oreo Dessert Recipe - no bake
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    If you love easy recipes, this may just become your new favorite easy dessert recipe! Not only is it quick, but it’s also a no-bake recipe (so no heating up the kitchen in the summer), and uses ingredients that you may even already have on hand!

    Plus, if you’re an Oreo fan, and love Oreo dessert recipes, it doesn’t get any better than this! Well, except maybe these Oreo Rice Krispy Treats and these Cookies and Cream cinnamon rolls but that’s a close call!

    This recipe starts with an Oreo crust and ends with Oreo crumbs (like in our easy Oreo Mousse), with a middle that’s full of delicious, creamy ingredients like instant pudding, cream cheese, and more to help give it the crunch and creaminess that creates the perfect combination for a delicious dessert!

    Is this the same as an Oreo pudding dessert?

    Yes and no. This recipe does use instant pudding mix and America’s favorite cookie but there are many dessert recipes that use Oreos and pudding together. Some recipes are simply a layer of pudding and topped with crushed cookies and Cool Whip.
    However, this recipe has an Oreo crust, a cream cheese layer, chocolate pudding layer, Cool Whip layer, and crushed cookies that makes it the perfect dessert and way more than just pudding and Oreos!

    How to Make this No-Bake Oreo Dessert

    For the best result, plan to make this at least 2 hours in advance so the delicious treat will have time to set. (Which means for it to thicken a little, so it’s easier to slice and serve.) So it doesn’t take as long as a no-bake dessert, like this icebox cake recipe in case you need something faster.

    Recipe Ingredients:

    Ingredients for No Bake Oreo Dessert Recipe
    • Double Stuf Oreos (regular or family size) – regular Oreos will work too
    • Butter – Salted or unsalted are both great for this recipe.
    • Instant chocolate pudding – Like we use in this no-bake chocolate pie. Make sure you don’t grab the “cook-and-serve” pudding.
    • Milk – (whole, 2%, or skim will work)
    • Cool Whip Topping – You can also make your own whipped cream instead if you prefer.

    How to Make This Oreo Dessert

    1. Place 2 rows of double-stuffed Oreos in a large Ziploc bag. Seal the top, and using the palm of your hands, crush the cookies into small chunks. (Some people prefer using a rolling pin or food processor to crush them if you find that easier.)
    2. Once they are small chunks, pour the crushed Oreos out into a 9 x 13-inch baking pan. (Image 1 below.)
    3. Place the remaining row of Oreos in the Ziploc bag and crush them to use for the topping.
    4. Pour the melted butter over the Oreo chunks in the baking pan, and mix with a spoon. Pat down and set it in the refrigerator to chill and set. (Image 2 below.)
    crushed oreos in baking dish
    1. Using the whisk attachment on a stand mixer (or a hand mixer or whisk), pour the milk into a large bowl and add the pudding powder. Mix pudding on low speed until the powder is incorporated. Then turn the mixer on higher speed and mix until the pudding gets thick.
    pudding mixture - whisked in large mixing bowl
    1. Transfer the pudding into a bowl and place in the fridge to chill.
    2. Wash out the mixing bowl and whip the softened cream cheese until fluffy. (Image 3 below.) Slowly add in the powdered sugar in to the cream cheese mixture and beat until smooth. Fold in one container of the Cool Whip. (Image 4 below.)
    Whipped cream cheese and cool whip how-to for oreo dessert
    1. Remove the pan with the Oreo crust from the fridge and layer the dessert together with the following layers:
      – Oreo crust (Image 5 below.)
      – cream cheese and Cool Whip mixture (Image 6 below.)
      – chocolate pudding (Image 7 below.)
      – Cool Whip (Image 8 below.)
      – Oreo cookie crumbs (Image 9 below.)
    spread cream cheese mixture over oreos
    chocolate pudding layer and cool whip layer collage
    top Oreo dessert with crushed cookies
    1. Place plastic wrap over the dessert and refrigerate for at least 2 hours before slicing into pieces.
    No Bake Oreo Dessert in Baking Dish

    Expert Tips:

    • Thaw the containers of Cool Whip in the refrigerator overnight so it’s easier to work with.
    • Pro Tip: To loosen the cookie crust of the first slice, heat up a dishcloth under running hot water and wring out. Place the dishcloth under the corner where you want to make the first slice. Leave it for about a minute and then cut and remove the slice. The heat will help loosen up the Oreo crust and help you enjoy this heavenly Oreo dessert even faster!
    Slice of no bake Oreo dessert on a white plate with cookies

    More Options and Additional Add-On Ideas

    If you’d love to experiment and add more ingredients to this Oreo cookie recipe, feel free to try adding items such as:

    • peanut butter cups
    • peanut butter for a peanut butter Oreo dessert
    • drizzle with chocolate syrup
    • vanilla pudding instead of chocolate
    • heavy whipping cream – made in to whipped cream – instead of Cool Whip
    • chocolate Oreos
    • white chocolate chips or milk chocolate chips
    No Bake Oreo Pudding Dessert on a plate

    Related Recipes

    I know you’re going to love this amazing dessert, especially on hot days, but if you’d like to see more of our favorite desserts, I think you’ll love these:

    • Slice of possum pie on a white plate with a fork sitting next to it with a bite on it.
      Possum Pie
    • Chocolate Chip Cookie Dough Fudge
      Cookie Dough Fudge
    • No bake peanut butter pie
      No Bake Peanut Butter Pie
    • Slice of no bake Oreo cheesecake on a plate with a Hugs Kiss, candy bar and Oreo cookie.
      Oreo Cheesecake

    But don’t forget about breakfast because making these Oreo Cookie Pancakes will start your day right!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Slice of no bake Oreo dessert on plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 25 votes

    The BEST Oreo Dessert

    This no-bake Oreo dessert recipe, made with simple ingredients such as Oreo Cookies, cool whip, pudding mix, and cream cheese makes this an easy sweet treat!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 410kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 package Double Stuf Oreos regular or family size
    • ½ cup melted butter
    • 2 – 3.9 oz. packages of instant chocolate pudding mix
    • 3 ¼ cups milk
    • 2 – 8 ounces containers Cool Whip thawed – see expert tips in blog post
    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened to room temperature
    • ¾ cup powdered sugar

    Instructions

    • Place 2 rows of double stuffed Oreos in a large Ziploc bag. Seal the top, and using the palm of your hands, crush the cookies into small chunks. (Some people prefer using a rolling pin or food processor to crush them, if you find that easier.)
    • Once they are small chunks, pour the crushed Oreos out into a 9 x 13-inch baking pan.
    • Place the remaining row of Oreos in the Ziploc bag and crush them to use for the topping.
    • Pour the melted butter over the Oreo chunks in the baking pan, and mix with a spoon. Pat down and set in the refrigerator to chill and set.
    • Using the whisk attachment on a stand mixer (or a hand mixer or whisk), pour the milk into a large bowl and add the pudding powder. Mix pudding on low speed until the powder is incorporated. Then turn the mixer on higher speed and mix until the pudding gets thick.
    • Transfer the pudding into a bowl and place in the fridge to chill.Wash out the mixing bowl and whip the softened cream cheese until fluffy.
    • Slowly add in the powdered sugar in to the cream cheese mixture and beat until smooth. Fold in one container of Cool Whip.
    • Remove the pan with the Oreo crust from the fridge and layer the dessert together with the following layers:
      – Oreo crust
      – cream cheese and cool whip mixture
      – chocolate pudding
      – Cool Whip
      – Oreo cookie crumbs
    • Place plastic wrap over the dessert and refrigerate for at least 2 hours before slicing into pieces.

    Video

    Notes

    • Thaw containers of Cool Whip in the refrigerator overnight so it’s easier to work with.
    • Pro Tip: To loosen the cookie crust of the first slice, heat up a dishcloth under running hot water and wring out. Place the dishcloth under the corner where you want to make the first slice. Leave it for about a minute and then cut and remove the slice. The heat will help loosen up the Oreo crust and help you enjoy this heavenly Oreo dessert even faster!
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 410kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 48mg | Sodium: 359mg | Potassium: 202mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 28g | Vitamin A: 598IU | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 3mg

    Peach Cobbler with Canned Peaches

    December 9, 2024

    slice of peach cobbler on white plate

    Peach Cobbler with Canned Peaches: This amazing cobbler recipe requires only 7 simple ingredients and is ready in minutes! Use canned peaches to make this a quick and easy dessert.

    Peach cobbler with canned peaches

    You may also love the peach cobbler recipe that uses Bisquick, or you can make this peach cobbler with cake mix if you have that on hand!

    Then, if you’re in the peach recipe mood, make sure you try this easy peach mango pie recipe!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Peach Cobbler with Canned Peaches Recipe

    • It’s an oven baked dessert that is ready to bake, in minutes.
    • You can switch out the peaches for your favorite fruit (see list of ideas below).
    • Canned Peaches: Keep canned peaches in the pantry for a last-minute dessert idea.
    • It’s delicious by itself or you can serve a scoop of vanilla ice cream with it.
    • Take it to a potluck, serve it after a home-cooked dinner, or deliver it to a friend who could use it.
    • It is the easiest recipe and could very well become one of your new favorite cobbler recipes, or even favorite desserts to make!

    Ingredients for Easy Peach Cobbler

    Ingredients for peach cobbler on table.

    The ingredients for this peach cobbler with canned peaches are simple and you probably already have them on hand to make this easy peach cobbler recipe! If not, you can grab them at almost any grocery store.

    Here are some notes about the key ingredients for this peach cobbler with canned peaches recipe:

    • Butter – Salted or unsalted butter works for this recipe. If salted, you may want to cut back a bit on the extra salt added but I’ve used both unsalted salted and like how both turn out.
    • Flour – All-purpose flour is recommended for this recipe since I use baking powder as well, to help it rise.
    • Milk – I prefer to use whole milk when baking but you can use your favorite type.

    Scroll to the bottom of this post to see the recipe card with all of the ingredients and directions!

    TIP: Do you have other fruit on hand besides peaches? Feel free to substitute the peaches for your favorite fresh fruit since we drain the juices anyway! See the fruit substitution ideas below!

    • blackberries
    • blueberries
    • strawberries
    • canned pears
    • cherries

    Step-by-Step Instructions

    Melt butter in 8x8 baking dish
    1. Melt your stick of butter right in the baking dish you plan to make your cobbler in. (An 8×8 or 9×9 glass baking dish is ideal for this — or double the batch and make it in a 9 x 13 baking or casserole dish.)
    Peach cobbler batter mixed together in a bowl
    1. In a separate mixing bowl, pour in the flour, sugar, milk, baking powder, and salt.
    2. Mix together until evenly combined.
    Pour cobbler batter on top of butter in baking dish
    1. Pour flour mixture batter on top of melted butter. (DO NOT MIX!)
    Place canned peaches (without juice) on top
    1. Place canned peaches (drained) on top of batter and butter. (DO NOT MIX!)
    Baked peach cobbler dump cake
    1. Bake in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 35-40 minutes, and when the top is golden brown.
    Single serving of peach cobbler on plate
    1. Remove from oven and serve warm.

    What to Serve with Peach Cobbler

    This peach cobbler is delicious by itself but if you’d like to serve a little something extra with it, you should consider:

    • vanilla ice cream
    • caramel or butterscotch drizzle
    • sugared strawberries
    • sprinkle of cinnamon
    • vanilla sauce we use in bread pudding
    • sprinkle of brown sugar
    • whipped cream

    Expert Tips to Make the Best Peach Cobbler:

    Can I use fresh peaches instead of canned for peach cobbler?

    You can. The great thing about canned though is that the peach slices may be a little softer compared to some ripe peaches that may not be very ripe and the sugary syrup that the peaches are in, in the can, tend to be sweeter. But it’s definitely an option to make this using fresh, especially if you have juicy peaches.

    How do you store leftover peach cobbler with canned peaches?

    If you have leftover cobbler, you can store it in an airtight container or simply cover the dish with aluminum foil or plastic wrap and store on the counter, at room temperature, for the day. However, if it’s more than a day, store it in the refrigerator.

    Is a cobbler the same thing as a crisp or crumble?

    No. A cobbler has a “biscuit-like” or “pastry-like” topping, where a crisp has an oat or streusel-type topping that has a “crunch”.

    Storage Instructions:

    Room Temperature: You can store peach cobbler at room temperature, covered, for 1-2 days.

    Refrigerate: To make peach cobbler last longer, it’s best to refrigerate in an airtight container, or covered, for up to 5 days.

    Freeze: You can even freeze peach cobbler in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Allow it to thaw in the refrigerator when ready to enjoy.

    More Easy Dessert Recipes:

    As a beginner cook or someone who loves adding simplicity to your life, it’s always a great idea to have ingredients for a quick and easy dessert on hand for those last-minute needs!

    • Egg custard slice on white plate.
      Egg Custard
    • Slice of ugly duckling cake on white plates.
      Ugly Duckling Cake
    • Caramel Apple Dump Cake
    • Donut bread pudding in baking dish, next to donuts.
      Donut Bread Pudding

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    slice of peach cobbler on white plate
    Print Pin
    4.91 from 250 votes

    Peach Cobbler with Canned Peaches

    This amazing peach cobbler recipe with canned peaches requires only 7 simple ingredients and is ready in minutes!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 308kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter (stick butter)
    • 1 cup flour
    • 1 cup sugar
    • 1 cup milk
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 2 cups peaches without juice

    Instructions

    • Prep: Preheat oven to 350 degrees.
    • Melt butter: In a microwave safe, 8×8 or 9×9 baking dish, melt the stick of butter in the microwave.
    • Mix batter: In a separate bowl, mix together flour, sugar, milk, baking powder & salt.
    • Pour in to dish: Pour batter on top of the melted butter in the baking pan. (Do not mix.)
    • Add peaches: Pour peaches (make sure it is drained!) on top of batter mixture. (Do not mix.)
    • Bake cobbler: Bake for 35-40 minutes, until top is almost a golden brown.

    Video

    Notes

    Can I use fresh peaches instead of canned peaches?
    You can. The great thing about canned though is that the peaches may be a little softer compared to fresh peaches that may not be very ripe and the sugary syrup that the peaches are in, in the can, tend to be sweeter. But it’s definitely an option to make this using fresh.
    How do you store leftover cobbler?
    If you have leftover cobbler, you can store it in an airtight container or simply cover the dish with aluminum foil or plastic wrap and store on the counter for the day. However, if it’s more than a day, store it in the refrigerator.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 308kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 164mg | Potassium: 210mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 580IU | Vitamin C: 1.3mg | Calcium: 86mg | Iron: 1mg

    Chicken Bites

    December 7, 2024

    Cooked chicken bites with salt, pepper and browned butter.

    Chicken Bites – Pieces of chicken breast tenderloins (or your favorite cut of chicken), cooked in browned butter and seasoned with salt and pepper, and cooked on the stove-top in just 8 minutes. It sounds simple, and it is, but full of so much flavor.

    Chicken bites in a dish, that were cooked with browned butter, salt and pepper.

    This chicken recipe is so versatile and we love rotating this for an easy dinner recipe, with these baked chicken drumsticks in the oven and these air fryer buffalo chicken tenders!

    Why Make These Easy Chicken Bites?

    I know, it looks like plain, cooked chicken, doesn’t it? But it’s not. It’s HOW it’s cooked that makes it the best.

    When I first experimented with cooking meat in browned butter for the BEST steak recipe on the planet… the way I cooked meat on the stovetop, changed forever.

    • Flavor – The browned butter creates a flavor that adds so much to the dish.
    • Ready in under 10 minutes – This chicken recipe is ready in under 10 minutes. Now that’s a dinner recipe that makes the “favorites” list.
    • Juicy chicken – Cooked on high, it sears the chicken and traps in the juices.

    Ingredients

    Chicken, salt, pepper, and butter. That’s it! Let me explain…

    • Butter – Feel free to use salted or unsalted butter for this recipe. But the key is to cook the butter in the skillet over high heat until it has turned brown. The butter develops a flavor that can’t be achieved from spices.
    • Salt and Pepper – Classics, yet a must. I prefer kosher salt and cracked peppercorns but regular ground black pepper works as well.
    • Chicken – Here I used chicken tenderloins but you can use chicken breast or chicken thighs. Chicken thighs tend to be juicer and they’re a dark meat. Chicken breasts are white meat, so they’ll have a slightly different flavor. We love both so it’s your preference but I recommend using boneless, skinless of either to keep things easy when cutting in to smaller, 1-inch pieces.

    How to Make Chicken Bites

    You can find the entire recipe and printable recipe card at the bottom of this post.

    Raw chicken pieces, seasoned with salt and pepper.
    1. Begin by cutting chicken in to approximately 1-inch pieces and sprinkle on the salt and pepper.
    Butter melted in skillet and browned.
    2. Place butter in skillet, and turn burner to medium-high heat, and allow it to melt, and cook until it turns brown.
    Raw chicken in cast iron pan, seasoned with salt and pepper.
    3. Add seasoned chicken pieces to hot skillet, spread them out, and allow it to sit, to sear. *See tip below.
    Cooked chicken bites in cast iron skillet.
    4. When the bottom sides of the chicken start to turn golden brown (usually 1-2 minutes) flip the pieces of chicken to allow the other sides to cook.

    TIP: Constantly turning and flipping the chicken pieces will keep the chicken from searing so it’s best to let it sit once you’ve spread the chicken out. Try to make sure it’s an even layer of chicken and each piece is able to sear on the sillet. Constantly moving will cause the chicken to “steam” cook instead and it will lack flavor.

    Cooked chicken bites in a single serving dish.

    5. When the chicken is fully cooked, usually around 3-4 minutes (when the internal temperature reaches 165°F) quickly remove the chicken to a serving plate. If desired, sprinkle with a little salt and let the chicken rest for a minute before serving.

    Recipe Tips

    • Cast Iron Skillet: I prefer using a cast iron skillet when making this recipe. It sears the chicken so much better than my nonstick skillets, although a nonstick skillet can be used just fine.
    • Meal Planning: Doubling or tripling this recipe is a great idea to use it to make meals later in the week, such as these easy chicken street tacos or this pasta salad with chicken.
    • Chicken Cook-Time: The time it takes to cook could vary, and be different than what it takes for mine. Due to the size of the chicken pieces, the type of skillet, and the level of heat your stovetop is putting out.

    Optional Step

    When cooking with salt and pepper, a lot of times the salt and pepper can fall off of the food during the cooking process.

    So although I add salt and pepper to the chicken before cooking, I also love to sprinkle on a little more kosher salt while it’s resting. This makes a BIG difference.

    Just be careful not to put too much salt in and on your chicken. You can always add more, but it’s hard to take it away.

    Skillet chicken bites in dish and hand holding one piece on a toothpick.

    What to Serve with These Chicken Bites

    You can serve the chicken bites alone with toothpicks, or guests can dip them in their favorite dipping sauce like a homemade copycat Chick-fil-A sauce recipe, or this delicious teriyaki sauce recipe, kind of like I do with this teriyaki chicken and rice recipe.

    Side Dishes for Chicken Bites

    Serving easy-to-make sides is key, to keep dinner easy all around. Here are some of my favorite side dishes to go with this chicken, whether it’s to serve on the side, or to add the chicken to:

    • Garlic roasted broccoli in square bowl, sitting on linen napkin.
      Garlic Roasted Broccoli
    • Cream Cheese Pasta being scooped up and held above the plate.
      Cream Cheese Pasta
    • Instant Pot parmesan risotto in a bowl.
      Instant Pot Parmesan Risotto
    • Fried potatoes and onions in cast iron skillet.
      Fried Potatoes and Onions

    If you love easy chicken recipes, then you’re also going to love this Sticky Chicken on a Stick!

    More Chicken Recipes You’ll LOVE:

    • My husband said that I HAVE to make this again. It's so easy, so SURE! BBQ Chicken Pasta Recipe
      BBQ Chicken Pasta
    • Almond meal chicken tenders recipe.
      Low Carb Parmesan Chicken Tenders
    • Chicken and noodles in a white bowl with fork holding a bite.
      Chicken and Noodles Recipe
    • Homemade Chicken Pot Pie in white pie dish, with a peek at the veggies and chicken.
      Easy Chicken Pot Pie Recipe

    Recipe

    Cooked chicken bites with salt, pepper and browned butter.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Chicken Bites

    Chicken Bites – Pieces of chicken cooked on the stove-top in browned butter, salt and pepper, and has ton of juicy flavor! Ready in 8 minutes, this is a quick dinner the family will love.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 3 minutes minutes
    Total Time 8 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 166kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1-1 ½ pounds chicken tendloins, breasts, or thighs (boneless, skinless and trimmed of any fat/skin)
    • 2 tablespoons salted butter
    • 1 teaspoon kosher salt or to taste, divided
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper or to taste

    Instructions

    • Cut chicken into small, bite-size pieces.
    • Season chicken with ½ teaspoon salt and ½ teaspoon black pepper, and toss to make sure it's evenly seasoned.
    • Melt butter in a pan over medium-high heat (I prefer cooking in a cast iron skillet) until it begins to turn a slight brown.
    • Place chicken pieces in hot butter/skillet and let cook for about one minute, until the undersides turn a beautiful golden brown. 
    • Flip the pieces over and continue cooking for another minute or two, until the inside is cooked. (Don't feel like you have to flip one at a time.)
    • Once chicken has cooked through, remove from skillet and place chicken in serving bowl/plate and sprinkle with remaining kosher salt. 
    • Let the chicken rest for a minute or two to allow the juices to really soak in!

    Notes

    *Type of Chicken: Feel free to use your favorite type of chicken. Chicken breasts, tenderloins or thighs work wonderful for this recipe.
    * Pepper: I prefer using black peppercorn instead of black ground pepper but either work great.
    * Chicken Cook-Time: The time it takes to cook could vary, and be different than what it takes for mine. Due to the size of the chicken pieces, the type of skillet, and the level of heat your stovetop is putting out.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tenderloins | Calories: 166kcal | Protein: 21g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 79mg | Sodium: 748mg | Potassium: 370mg | Vitamin A: 205IU | Vitamin C: 1.2mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 0.4mg

    Chicken Bacon Ranch Bites

    December 7, 2024

    Chicken bacon ranch crescent roll bite on plate.

    Chicken Bacon Ranch Bites are now a new go-to favorite to make when needing an appetizer recipe to take to a party or serve at your cocktail party. They’re easy to make, use simple ingredients, and are ready in under 30 minutes!

    Chicken bacon ranch crescent roll bite on plate.

    My Hawaiian roll chicken, bacon, ranch sliders, (or in bigger form, these shredded chicken sandwiches), and this bacon, ranch, chicken pasta recipe are a few other variations of using these same flavors.

    When taking an appetizer to a party or holiday celebration, it’s great to take classic recipes like this Rotel dip with Velveeta Cheese or something like these BBQ Crockpot Little Smokies but why not make something that the others will be surprised by and fall in love with! These cheesy chicken appetizers will make the others swoon.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love These

    • Easy Recipe – It only takes a few steps to make these chicken ranch bites. Simply place crescent rolls in a mini muffin tin, mix the filling, and bake!
    • Flavors – Bacon, ranch, and cheese together tend to be a favorite in many party recipes, and in homes all over for a family-friendly dinner.
    • Make Ahead – Mix together the filling ahead of time, so all you have to do is assemble and bake these bites for a really quick appetizer. I’d even say it would be a good idea to make the filling in the crock pot ahead of time (like I did with these crack chicken sandwiches) and then prep these as directed.

    Ingredients Needed

    The ingredients for this recipe are simple and easy to find in most grocery stores! I’ve provided notes about the key ingredients below.

    Ingredients on table for making chicken bacon ranch bites.
    • Shredded Cheese: Pre-shredded cheddar cheese works for this recipe but for best results like with most recipes, shredding block cheese can have a much better result, since it melts better and has better flavor.
    • Bacon: You can bake bacon in the oven, whether it’s baking turkey bacon or regular. Or, if you have an air fryer, you can even cook bacon in the air fryer.
    • Parsley: Fresh is highly recommended here but if you only have dried, that’s fine to use too.
    • Ranch Dressing: Using your favorite storebought ranch dressing works here. My favorite to use is making it at home with the Hidden Valley Ranch dressing packet with buttermilk and mayonnaise.

    How to Make Chicken Bacon Ranch Bites

    Preheat your oven to 375°F.

    Crescent roll in a ball sitting on cutting board.
    Ingredients in bowl for mixing and filling crescent roll cups.

    Pinch off small pieces of the crescent rolls and form into small little bowls and place in muffin cups.

    Next, mix up all of the ingredients (besides the crescent rolls) in a medium-sized mixing bowl.

    Crescent roll dough in mini muffin tin.
    Crescent roll cups filled with chicken bacon and ranch.

    Fill each greased mini muffin cup with the chicken, bacon, and ranch dressing mixture and bake for 12-15 minutes or until the crescent rolls are golden brown and the filling is heated through.

    Baked chicken, bacon, ranch cheese bites in muffin tin.

    Recipe Tips

    • Pre-cooked chicken: Rotisserie chicken and crock pot shredded chicken, are my secret for easy recipes like this. I always try to keep one on hand or in the freezer for quick recipes. Or you can even see how to boil chicken breasts on the stove if you need an easy way to cook chicken.
    • Spice things up by using this jalapeno ranch recipe to use instead of storebought.
    • Large Quantities: This recipe is easy to double if feeding a large crowd for a big event.
    Chicken, bacon, ranch and cheese bites in crescent rolls.

    Storage Instructions

    Leftovers: Once the baked chicken ranch bites have fully cooled off, store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-5 days.

    Reheat: If you have an air fryer, reheating them in the air fryer is a great option so they’ll have less chance of being soggy. You can also place them back in the oven and reheat them at 350°F, for a few minutes until heated through. Tip: You can also cover with aluminum foil so the crescent rolls won’t burn before heating through.

    Related Recipes

    I love entertaining and I LOVE food, so you’ve come to the right place! Browse my easy party appetizers for more ideas! Or, here are other favorite appetizers:

    • Cheese dip in sauce pan, with soft pretzels surrounding it.
      Pretzel Cheese Dip
    • Chicken salad with grapes and apples, sitting on bread.
      Chicken Salad with Grapes and Apples
    • The best guacamole in a small bowl with fresh cilantro on top.
      The BEST Guacamole Recipe
    • Mussels cooked in white wine and garlic sauce, stacked on plate, next to toasts.
      Mussels in White Wine Sauce

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chicken bacon ranch crescent roll bite on plate.
    Print Pin
    4.86 from 7 votes

    Chicken Bacon Ranch Bites

    Chicken bacon ranch bites are a delicious filling made of ranch dressing, chicken, bacon inside of a crescent roll cup, making this an appetizer recipe that will go quickly!
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes minutes
    Total Time 27 minutes minutes
    Servings 24 mini muffin tin sized
    Calories 116kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 rolls refrigerated crescent rolls
    • 1 rotisserie chicken chopped (we just used the breast meat)
    • ½ cup ranch dressing or use this jalapeno ranch dressing recipe
    • ½ cup shredded cheddar cheese
    • 1 green onion diced
    • 1 sprig of fresh parsley finely chopped
    • 3 strips bacon cooked and chopped

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees F.
    • Mix all the ingredients (except crescent dough) into a bowl.
    • Open the crescent dough and form into a ball. The dough is easier to work with if used right out of the refrigerator. If it gets too warm, it will be sticky.
    • Pull off small pieces of dough and flatten it (in your hand) out to a circle shape.
    • Press the dough down into a greased mini muffin tin.
    • Spoon a scoop of the chicken filling into each cup. Top with a little more cheese if you wish!
    • Bake for 12-15 minutes or until crescent is golden brown.

    Notes

    For make-ahead instructions: If you’d like to make this ahead of time, I recommend making the filling only, ahead of time. Then, when ready to serve, assemble the crescent roll cups, fill, and then bake.
    Add-on Ideas: Love extra flavors? Sprinkle with parmesan cheese, crushed red pepper, or drizzle with extra ranch dressing.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1crescent bite | Calories: 116kcal | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 184mg | Potassium: 46mg | Vitamin A: 65IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 0.3mg

    Donut Bread Pudding

    December 6, 2024

    Donut bread pudding in baking dish, next to donuts.

    This donut bread pudding recipe is so easy and delicious, using only simple ingredients; using regular glazed or Krispy Kreme donuts but feel free to experiment with your favorite kind!

    It’s hard to top our favorite bread pudding, but donuts have been a top favorite since I recommend trying new types of bread to use in that recipe.

    Donut bread pudding in baking dish, sitting next to donuts.
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why Make a Donut Bread Pudding?

    Well, why not?

    But in all seriousness… we’ve all been there. Our eyes were bigger than our belly and we ordered way too many donuts. So when they start to get a little stale, it’s hard to throw away those golden little circles.

    So using up donuts in a bread pudding is the next best thing. You may even want to make a batch of these Bronuts, just to use them in a bread pudding!

    Recipe Ingredients

    Donut bread pudding ingredients on a table.
    • Milk – I like to use whole milk but you can use your favorite type.
    • Butter – Salted or unsalted butter will work.
    • Donuts – I’ve listed types of donuts that work great for this recipe below but making sure they’re stale is key.

    See the recipe card for a full list of ingredients and quantities.

    Notice that I didn’t use sugar in this recipe, like in my original bread pudding recipe. That’s because donuts already have sugar and adding more isn’t typically necessary.

    However, if your donuts aren’t very sweet, you may choose to add ¼ cup of white granulated sugar if you feel it is needed.

    What Kind of Donuts to Use

    We recommend using your favorite glazed donuts, like Krispy Kreme’s, but feel free to use other flavors like:

    • apple cider donuts
    • chocolate iced
    • cake donuts (like my circus animal donuts or red velvet cake donuts)
    • donut holes
    • gluten free donuts
    • … really any kind of stale or “day old” donuts that you have on hand should work. (However, watch the “filled” and “jelly donuts” as those may add a texture that you’re not looking for.)

    How to Make Donut Bread Pudding

    You can find the full recipe card with ingredients and instructions toward the bottom of this post!

    Begin by preheating your oven to 350°F. and grease an 8×8 baking dish with nonstick spray or butter.

    Pieces of glazed donuts in baking dish for bread pudding.
    Step 1. Break donuts in to approx. 1-inch pieces and place in dish. Pour melted butter over the top.
    Egg mixture with spices in glass mixing bowl for bread pudding recipe.
    Step 2. Mix eggs, milk, cinnamon and vanilla in a bowl.
    Bread pudding batter poured over donut pieces in baking dish.
    Step 3. Pour the egg mixture over the broken pieces of donuts and press to make sure the donut pieces have been saturated. Allow to sit for 10 minutes.
    Baked donut bread pudding in baking dish.
    Step 4. Bake in the preheated oven for 45 minutes. Enjoy warm.

    What to Serve with Donut Bread Pudding

    My favorite way to serve this donut bread pudding is warm. You may also choose to make a vanilla cream sauce to go on top but it’s not required.

    Fresh berries or even a whipped cream would look and taste lovely on the side as well.

    Recipe Tips

    • Donuts not stale? If you have donuts that are not stale, you can leave them out, uncovered, overnight.
    • Want to add more or different toppings? Feel free to add fruit glazes (think jelly-filled donut flavor), fruit, chocolate chips, nuts, and more!
    • Feeling creative? Feel free to add nutmeg, pumpkin pie spice, or your favorite warm spice to this recipe as well.

    Recipe FAQs

    What can I do with leftover doughnuts?

    Making doughnut bread pudding is a great way to use leftover doughnuts, and you can even freeze them (or it) for later.

    Do you have to refrigerate bread pudding?

    Yes. Even though it is baked, it’s best to refrigerate any leftovers. Wait until it has fully cooled before covering it and storing it in the refrigerator.

    How long to bake donut bread pudding?

    Baking this donut bread pudding for 45 minutes gives a “soggier” type bread pudding, so baking it longer is recommended if you prefer a different, dryer, texture.

    More Dessert Recipes Like This

    If you love desserts like this one, then you’ll also love this easy chocolate bread pudding, sweet potato pudding, this croissant bread pudding recipe and this banana bread pudding recipe!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Donut bread pudding in baking dish, next to donuts.
    Print Pin
    4.95 from 38 votes

    Donut Bread Pudding

    This donut bread pudding recipe is so easy and delicious, using simple ingredients; and glazed donuts or your favorite day-old donuts.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 617kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 6 stale glazed donuts
    • 2 tablespoons melted butter
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla
    • 4 beaten eggs
    • 2 cups milk
    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon

    Instructions

    • Pre-heat oven to 350 degrees.
    • Grease an 8×8 baking dish with nonstick spray or extra butter.
    • Cut up 6 stale donuts in to small cubes and place in the greased baking dish. Pour melted butter over the top of the donuts.
    • In a medium mixing bowl, add in 4 beaten eggs (or beat the eggs in the bowl before adding the following ingredients).
    • Add in the 2 cups of milk, 1 teaspoon of cinnamon, and 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract and mix until combined well.
    • Pour the mixture over the cubed donuts. Let soak for 10 minutes.
    • Bake for 45 minutes. Serve warm. You can also top it with this vanilla sauce recipe.

    Video

    Notes

    • If you have donuts that are not stale, you can leave them out, uncovered, overnight.
    • Want to add more or different toppings? Feel free to add fruit glazes (think jelly-filled donut flavor), fruit, chocolate chips, nuts, and more!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 617kcal | Carbohydrates: 65g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 453mg | Potassium: 120mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 217IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 213mg | Iron: 5mg

    Cheesy Rice

    December 4, 2024

    Cheesy rice in plate.

    This cheesy rice recipe, made using taco seasoning, a can of Rotel, and a few other ingredients topped with queso cheese, makes it an easy recipe that can be a side dish or easy dinner recipe when served with a protein like chicken.

    Your favorite store-bought queso makes this recipe a breeze, where the ingredients can be kept on hand for a quick 30-minute dinner too.

    Cheesy rice, Spanish rice covered in Queso cheese sauce.

    Mexican dishes like I have at some of my favorite Mexican restaurants like these chicken street tacos, these chicken fajitas wraps or these steak quesadillas are some of my favorites to make at home.

    Now, this cheesy Mexican rice goes perfectly with those dishes and even enjoyed by themselves.

    Cheesy Rice Recipe Highlights

    • 5 Ingredients – With just a few simple ingredients, this dish is ready easily and quickly.
    • Shelf-Stable Ingredients – All of the ingredients can be kept on hand when you need something to store for those last-minute needs.
    • Great Base Recipe – Enjoy this recipe by itself or easily add your favorite additional toppings or mix-ins to make it your favorite. See additional ideas below.

    Ingredients Needed:

    Just a few ingredients are needed, and they’re simple! Make sure to check the recipe card below for the full lists of ingredients and instructions. I’ve provided a few notes about the key ingredients below.

    Ingredients for cheesy rice, on a table.
    • Rice – I prefer the Spanish recipe saffron yellow rice,that comes with the seasoning. This adds so much more flavor to the rice. However, making regular rice, is possible, it’s best to check the package directions for how long to cook the rice, in case it’s a different type.
    • Taco Seasoning – A packet of taco seasoning is normally what I use but you can also use my homemade chicken taco seasoning recipe.
    • Queso – Using your favorite queso recipe is highly recommended. I prefer the white, blanco queso but you can use yellow if you prefer. You may even choose to use my Rotel Dip recipe or Cowboy Queso for an elevated Mexican cheesy rice.
    • Diced Tomatoes & Green Chilies – I use “mild” but you can use “hot” if you prefer a spicier taco cheesy rice. I use half of a 10 ounce can. You can also choose to use 5 ounces of diced tomatoes if you don’t like the heat.
    • Chicken Broth – Usually this can be kept in the pantry when it’s in the can or in a box that hasn’t been opened. I didn’t have any of that on hand when I decided to make this, so I made my own chicken broth out of Better Than Bouillon.

    How to Make Cheesy Rice with Queso

    This is a recipe made on the stove-top, so it’s best to find a skillet that’s big enough to hold all of the ingredients required.

    Broth and seasoned Spanish rice in a skillet.
    Add seasoned rice and all other ingredients except queso to skillet.
    Cooked Spanish rice in a skillet.
    Cook rice – bring to a boil and reduce to simmer for 25 minutes.
    Cheesy rice on a fork, over a plate.
    When rice is tender and cooked, top with warmed Queso cheese, either on individual servings or pour over entire batch in the skillet. Mix if desired.

    Recipe Tips

    • Spice – This recipe, the way it’s made (mild Rotel, etc.) can pack a punch with spice. It’s not the spiciest thing I’ve ever eaten but it’s also not spice-free. I recommend if making this for the first time, try a bite after cooking, and if needed more spice can be added such as red pepper flakes, etc.
    • Feel Free to Add – Add roasted broccoli, cooked chicken breasts, grilled shrimp, or strips of steak to round out dinner. This chicken bites recipe is so easy to make and goes great with cheesy rice.

    Storage Instructions

    Allow the cheesy rice to fully cool before storing in an airtight container and placing it in to the refrigerator. This can be stored but is best enjoyed within 4-5 days.

    Recipe Tips

    Can you use long-grain rice or jasmine rice to make cheesy rice?

    You can. If you have the option to use a yellow rice that’s seasoned, it can add so much flavor. Where using a plain, white rice can have a more bland flavor.

    What goes well with cheesy rice?

    A protein such as these baked chicken cutlets goes well with a starchy side like this cheesy rice recipe. Or this roasted pork tenderloin pairs wonderfully with rice.

    What can I mix with rice to make it taste better?

    This recipe uses chicken broth to cook the rice in, giving it more flavor. Or spices such as taco seasoning, or garlic and cumin can season rice even more.

    Related Recipes

    Love easy recipes like this cheesy rice? Then you’ll also love these:

    • Fried rice in shallow bowl.
      How to Make Fried Rice
    • Baked chicken and rice casserole in baking dish.
      Old Fashioned Chicken and Rice Casserole
    • Taco Chicken Casserole on a plate.
      Taco Chicken Casserole
    • Walking Taco Casserole being lifted out of baking dish with spoon.
      Walking Taco Casserole

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Cheesy rice in plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Cheesy Rice

    Cheesy rice has a taco-seasoned rice with a white queso cheese on top or mixed in. So delicious and similar to the restaurant-style, favorite.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine Mexican
    Prep Time 3 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 28 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 611kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 5 ounces diced tomatoes and green chilies Half a can of Rotel, undrained.
    • 10 ounces yellow rice Spanish saffron rice recommended (with seasonings)
    • 2½ cups chicken broth
    • 1 Tablespoon olive oil optional
    • 1 ounce packet of taco seasoning or this taco seasoning recipe
    • 15 ounces queso

    Instructions

    • Mix all ingredients except queso in skillet, bring to boil on the stove, and then reduce the heat to a simmer, cover and cook for 25 min or until rice is tender and broth has been absorbed.
    • Fluff rice with a fork. Heat queso up in microwave or on the stove, and pour over rice.

    Notes

    • You can use the entire can of Rotel if you prefer more spice and more tomatoes in the mixture.
    • If you only have plain rice (without the included seasoning packet in the type of rice suggested) that’s ok to use, and it just may result in a milder flavor. Adding more seasoning at the end of the cooking process is an option if you find it needs more flavor.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 611kcal | Carbohydrates: 72g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 2865mg | Potassium: 430mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1399IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 418mg | Iron: 2mg

    Easy Lobster Bisque Recipe

    November 26, 2024

    Lobster bisque in small bowl with crackers on a plate underneath.

    Easy Lobster Bisque Recipe: Lobster soup with heavy cream, imitation lobster, and savory spices. Surprisingly easy to make with simple ingredients and something the whole family can enjoy!

    Lobster bisque in bowl, next to crackers, and parsley.

    What You’ll Love About This Recipe

    This lobster bisque is similar to lobster bisque at a fancy restaurant. The recipe and ingredients are simple but the flavors are strong and the texture is extra creamy.

    Imitation lobster is super easy to cook with, tasty, and saves you the hefty price tag of fresh lobster meat. Cooking bisque with imitation crab and lobster is so much more affordable but you can definitely use fresh, real lobster in this.

    I love reheating soup recipes for a quick and easy lunch the next day! Soup keeps well in the fridge so it’s perfect for meal prepping. (Especially this clam chowder recipe and this loaded baked potato soup recipe!)

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients for Lobster Bisque Soup

    You only need a handful of lobster bisque ingredients.

    Ingredients for easy lobster bisque.

    Full list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Old Bay Seasoning – I prefer using 4 tablespoons but you may want to start with 2, and add more later if desired, considering it can get spicy.
    • Fresh Parsley – I know it’s not always easy to keep fresh parsley on hand but it’s highly recommended for this recipe.
    • Imitation Lobster – Real lobster works too but imitation can be more affordable
    • Chicken Broth – Storebought or my easy chicken broth recipe is great for this too.

    Roux (optional – if you like a thicker bisque)

    • 2 Tablespoons all-purpose flour
    • 2 Tablespoons butter

    Or more, depending on the thickness of the bisque desired.

    Instructions for Easy Lobster Bisque

    Ingredients added to stock pot for lobster bisque.
    1. Add garlic, diced tomatoes, Old Bay, fresh parsley, chicken broth and pepper.
    Hand blender being used to blend soup in pot.
    2. Mix with blender.
    Lobster added to soup in pot.
    3. Add imitation lobster. Cook for 45 minutes.
    Heavy cream added to stock pot and soup ingredients.
    4. Add in heavy cream and cook until heated through.
    Lobster bisque being ladled out of stockpot.

    How to Make a Roux for Bisque:

    If you prefer a thicker bisque, you can make a roux to thicken it.

    1. In a small saucepan, melt 1 tablespoon of butter over medium heat, and add 1 tablespoon of flour.
    2. Whisk the roux mixture until a thick paste forms, about 3-5 minutes, or until the flour loses its raw smell. At this point, I will also add a ladle of the bisque to the roux and mix, just to help blend the roux in even better.
    3. Add the roux to the bisque, and continue stirring and simmer the bisque over medium-low heat until the bisque thickens to desired consistency.
    4. If soup does not reach the desired consistency, after about 10 minutes, repeat steps 8-10 until bisque is to your desired thickness.

    NOTE: My husband prefers a very thick bisque so I make a roux out of 8 tablespoons of butter and 8 tablespoons of flour.

    Variations

    There are a few different ways you can switch up this classic lobster bisque recipe!

    • Some people like to use tomato paste instead of petite diced tomatoes. Tomato paste will give your soup a thicker texture since there are less tomato juices.
    • Classic lobster bisque from New England uses white wine in its preparation. Feel free to swap some chicken stock for white wine.
    • Adding bay leaves or bay leaf seasoning to this recipe while cooking is another great way to add authentic flavor. Feel free to add more of your favorite herbs.
    Easy lobster bisque recipe made with imitation lobster.

    Can you Freeze Lobster Bisque?

    Yes! You can freeze lobster bisque for up to 3 months. I recommend freezing in an airtight container after your bisque has cooled completely. The cream might settle when you freeze but you’ll simply have to stir before serving.

    Expert Tips

    What is a substitute for lobster in lobster bisque?

    You can substitute crab (like in my crab bisque), shrimp, or even crawfish tail meat.

    How do you thicken bisque?

    If you’re someone who likes their soup then I recommend adding 2 tablespoon of flour with 2 tablespoon of butter. It won’t change the flavor but it will make your soup thicker!

    Is bisque hot or cold?

    Most lobster bisques and other recipes are served hot but they can also be served cold if that’s what you prefer. When serving cold, it’s important to make sure your soup is stirred all the way to prevent separation.

    What to Serve With Lobster Bisque

    The best lobster bisque recipe is served with warm bread, rolls or garlic biscuits, or breadsticks for the ultimate comfort meal. For a bigger meal, feel free to serve with a grilled cheese or even a caprese sandwich!

    More Seafood Recipes

    If you love seafood as much as we do, you’ll also love this Seafood Paella!

    Recipe

    Lobster bisque in small bowl with crackers on a plate underneath.
    Print Pin
    4.12 from 18 votes

    Easy Lobster Bisque Recipe

    Not only is this lobster bisque recipe so easy to make but it’s so delicious! Pair with warm bread for the ultimate comfort meal.
    Course Appetizer, Main Course, Soup
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 241kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 Tablespoon minced garlic finely minced
    • 2 14.5-ounce cans petite diced tomatoes with juices
    • 32 ounces chicken broth
    • 2-4 Tablespoons Old Bay seasoning or your desired spice level. Old Bay can get spicy. *See notes below.
    • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
    • 1 teaspoon black pepper or to taste
    • 2 cups imitation lobster chopped in to small pieces
    • 1 pint heavy cream
    • salt optional – add at the end if you feel it needs more salt since Old Bay contains salt.

    Roux (optional – if you like a thicker bisque)

    • 2 Tablespoons all-purpose flour
    • 2 Tablespoons butter room temperature

    Instructions

    • Add garlic, tomatoes, chicken broth, Old Bay seasoning, parsley and pepper to a large stock pot. Using an immersion blender, blend until the desired chunkiness. Or, if using a blender, pour the soup in to the blender. You may need to do two batches if it won't all fit which is why it's best to mix it before hand in the stock pot.
    • Add soup back to pot, and cook over medium heat.
    • Add your chopped imitation lobster.
    • Simmer on medium-low heat for about 45 minutes to really let the ingredients cook through one another.
    • Just before serving, add the heavy cream and cook until heated through. ** If you prefer a thinner bisque, you can stop at step 7.  If you prefer a thicker bisque, continue with step 8 (bisque pictured).
    • In a small saucepan, melt your butter over medium heat, and add the flour.
    • Whisk the roux mixture until a thick paste forms, about 3-5 minutes, or until the flour loses it’s raw smell.
    • Add the roux to the bisque, and continue stirring and simmer bisque over medium-low heat until bisque thickens to desired consistency.
    • If soup does not reach desired consistency, after about 10 minutes, repeat steps 8-10 until bisque is to your desired thickness.
      * See notes below about thickness.

    Video

    Notes

    * Seasoning: I prefer using 4 tablespoons of Old Bay Seasoning. However, it’s best to start with 2, and then add more just before serving if you feel it could use more. 
    * Thickness/Roux: As a gauge for consistency, my husband prefers a very thick bisque, requiring 8 tablespoons of butter and 8 tablespoons of flour. (Not pictured.)

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1bowl (⅛ recipe) | Calories: 241kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 88mg | Sodium: 50mg | Potassium: 61mg | Vitamin A: 1140IU | Vitamin C: 3.1mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 0.6mg

    Easy Fluffy Pancakes from Scratch

    November 24, 2024

    stack of pancakes with syrup

    An easy homemade easy, fluffy, American pancakes from scratch recipe that uses everyday ingredients that you probably already have on hand that makes the best pancakes every time!

    stack of pancakes with syrup

    In less than 10 minutes you’ll have one of the best breakfast foods that kids (big and small) will love and an easy recipe that you’ll save and use over and over again and will uplevel your Saturday mornings! These delicious homemade pancakes will become a new family favorite! (Well, these and these Oreo pancakes too!)

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Featured Comment:

    From Amanda: “Honestly, these are the best from scratch pancakes I’ve made. I used an extra teaspoon of sugar and I use Mexican vanilla and I legit melted a tablespoon of butter per pancake and let it sizzle and absorb into the crust and omg…y’all… I put the extra batter in the fridge to see how it cooks up tomorrow!“

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    I love pancake mixes like anyone but when you’re looking for a recipe from scratch, or even curious if you have the items on hand to make homemade pancakes, this recipe only uses basic ingredients that you probably already have on hand!

    Plus, it’s incredibly easy, it creates a flavorful, perfectly sweet and fluffy pancake that will make you wonder why you even used pancake mix in the first place!

    They’re a delicious weekend breakfast idea, to make for a brunch party (along with this ham and cheese croissant bake) when entertaining friends or also quick enough for a weekday morning before sending the kids off to school!

    And if it helps… my kids say this is the best pancake recipe, ever!

    fork holding a bite of pancakes

    How do you make pancakes fluffier?

    I’ve made a TON of pancakes in the 10 years of being a mother to my little boys… and to say that I’ve experimented with pancakes is an understatement! (This is probably why it was easy for me to come up with 95+ pancake topping ideas too! For real.)

    I’ve found that when doing the following, we get the fluffiest pancakes:

    • When mixing the batter, do NOT over-mix. Lumps are good and this creates a fluffy pancake, rather than chewy, flat pancakes.
    • Let your batter rest a little bit. (Maybe 5 minutes or so.)
    • Sometimes, adding a bit of acid (like mixing vinegar and milk like I do for substituting buttermilk in my buttermilk banana bread recipe) helps give the pancakes a fluffy, buttermilk pancake texture!

    Simple Ingredients

    See the photo below that shows you everything you need to make these basic pancakes.

    Ingredients for pancakes

    Interestingly, the ingredients are similar to my vanilla mug cake, so if you have extra, it’s a great idea to try that dessert recipe too.

    See the full recipe with ingredient amounts and instructions in the recipe card below.

    • all-purpose flour
    • baking powder
    • sugar
    • whole milk or buttermilk for buttermilk pancakes (skim milk or 2% will work too) Of, if you want to use almond milk, you can make this almond milk pancakes recipe!
    • egg
    • melted butter + extra for greasing pan or griddle (salted or unsalted butter)
    • vanilla extract (pure vanilla extract is always our favorite, instead of imitation but either will work!)

    Step By Step Directions for Easy Pancakes

    Begin by mixing dry ingredients in a large bowl.

    1. Pour in flour, baking powder, sugar and then mix together. (Photo 1, 2, 3, & 4 below.)
    Step by Step mixing dry ingredients: flour, baking powder, sugar

    2. Next, add in milk, egg, melted butter and vanilla. (Photos 5, 6, 7, & 8 below.)

    how to make pancakes steps - milk, egg, butter and vanilla

    3. Gently whisk together the ingredients, making sure it’s mixed evenly, WITHOUT mixing too much. Lumps are good and create fluffy pancakes, instead of flat, chewy pancakes. (Photos 9 & 10 below.)

    Gently whisk pancake batter - lumps are good

    4. Preheat griddle to 350° or pan to medium heat. (Letting the batter rise while preheating will help make fluffier pancakes as well.)

    5. When heated, coat the hot griddle or pan with butter so pancakes do not stick. (Photo 11 below.)

    6. Using a ¼ measuring cup (or batter dispenser) scoop up batter and pour pancakes on to buttered cooking surface about 2-3 inches apart. (Photo 12 below.)

    7. Flip pancakes when you notice bubbles starting to form on top of the pancakes. (Photo 13 below.)

    8. Cook the remaining side of pancakes for about 1 minute or until the bottoms are golden brown. (Photo 14 below.)

    how to cook pancakes on griddle

    Expert Tips and FAQs

    • Making Pancakes in Advance – You can actually make the pancake batter in advance. Simply mix as instructed and refrigerate in an air-tight, covered container for up to 2 days, until ready to cook.
    • Freezing Pancakes – Love having pancakes on hand? Or do you have leftover pancakes? You can make a large batch (simply double or triple the recipe using the quick-calculation buttons in the recipe card below to figure measurements for you) and once cooked and cooled, store the pancakes in the freezer until ready to reheat and serve!
    • DIY Pancake Mix: To save even more time in the future, whip up extra dry ingredients, mixed together to make a homemade pancake mix, and store in a sealable container or bag. Then, just add the wet ingredients when it comes time to make! Pro Tip: Print off the recipe card below and tape it to the plastic container for easy reference… OR, pour in a cute bottle and give it as a gift idea!
    How do you make buttermilk pancakes?

    Simply substitute buttermilk in place of the milk or substitute buttermilk by mixing regular milk with a few drops of lemon juice.

    What makes a good pancake?

    1. Making sure all of your ingredients are fresh and not expired – especially the baking powder
    2. Don’t overmix! Small lumps are good for fluffy pancakes. If overmixing, the pancakes will be flat.
    3. Rest the batter for about 5 minutes before cooking to allow it to “rise”.

    Can you cook pancakes in a skillet?

    Yes! I prefer an electric griddle because it makes more at one time. However, a skillet can also create an “edge” and allow the pancakes to have a crispier edge and a fluffy center! NOTE: See the image below of pancakes cooked in a skillet compared to the other pancake photos that are cooked on a griddle!) Simply butter a large skillet and cook pancakes over medium-high heat, according to the directions in the recipe card below!

    Easy Homemade Pancakes

    What to Serve with Pancakes

    If you’re looking to round out a heart breakfast, some of our favorite recipes to serve with pancakes are air fryer bacon, this meaty quiche, or these hash brown patties!

    Or, get the oven hot and try baking sausage patties in the oven!

    However we also love to serve:

    • eggs (scrambled, over-easy, over-medium)
    • sausage patties or links
    • biscuits and gravy (like our chorizo gravy!)
    • fresh fruit (like strawberries, grapes, orange slices, bananas, and more!)

    What to Mix in Pancakes

    Now, for the purpose of this video, I wanted to make regular pancakes. So, I left out some of my favorite pancake additions. I absolutely love adding special toppings, fillings, and even secret ingredients to sneak in for my kids. I love adding things like:

    • chocolate chips (milk chocolate or white chocolate)
    • blueberries
    • whipped cream
    • butternut squash (See my sneaky veggie pancake recipe for my kids: Butternut Squash Pancakes)
    • strawberry cream cheese (See my Stuffed Strawberry Cream Cheese French Toast recipe)
    • sweet potatoes
    • pumpkin (See my Pumpkin White Chocolate Pancakes with White Chocolate Maple Syrup recipe)
    • sprinkles and candy for special occasions
    • bananas
    • cinnamon

    …in case you feel like adding a little pizzaz to your own homemade pancake recipe!
    TIP: If using frozen berries, it’s best to thaw them before adding to the batter as the berries may still be cold or frozen even after frying the pancakes.

    Mix-in Ideas for pancakes - blueberries, chocolate chips, sprinkles

    If you love pancakes as much as I do, then you’ll want to get a hold of this list of over 95 pancake toppings to add to all sorts of pancakes!

    After you make the basic pancake recipe below, feel free to add in a little of any of those toppings above, and gently fold in to the batter! Fry as usual for the perfect pancakes that the whole family will love!

    Related Recipes

    We are BIG fans of pancakes around here, so if this is your first time here, I want to make sure you know about our sheet pan pancakes, these delicious blueberry pancakes, secret healthy ingredient pancakes (hint: the kids will never know!), and our pumpkin white chocolate pancakes that are perfect for fall!

    Or, if you’re looking for a gluten-free option, this gluten free pancake mix is wonderful!

    I’d also love to hear what you think of this recipe! Leave a rating and a comment down below if you have a little bit of time, to help others know what you think of it!

    Recipe

    stack of pancakes with syrup
    Print Pin
    4.97 from 29 votes

    Fluffy Pancakes from Scratch Recipe

    Easy pancakes from scratch that use everyday ingredients that you probably already have on hand that makes the best, fluffy pancakes every time!
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 2 minutes minutes
    Total Time 7 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 pancakes
    Calories 281kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1½ cups all purpose flour
    • 3½ teaspoons baking powder
    • 3 tablespoons sugar
    • 1¼ cups whole milk or buttermilk for buttermilk pancakes
    • 1 egg
    • 3 tablespoons melted salted butter
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Instructions

    • In a mixing bowl, mix together the flour, baking powder, and sugar.
    • Next, add in the milk, egg, 3 tablespoons of melted butter and vanilla.
    • Using a whisk, lightly mix the batter blending the ingredients. Do not overmix. Lumps are good!
    •  Use an additional tablespoon of butter, and melt in the pan over medium heat.
    • Using the ¼ measuring cup, scoop out a serving of batter on the butter covered pan.
    • When bubbles start to form on top of the pancake, flip.
    • Cook this side of the pancake for about 1-2 minutes, or until the color of the underside of the pancake reaches a golden brown.

    Video

    Notes

    • Making Pancakes in Advance – You can actually make the pancake batter in advance. Simply mix as instructed and refrigerate in an air-tight, covered container for up to 2 days, until ready to cook.
    • Freezing Pancakes – Love having pancakes on hand? You can make a large batch (simply double or triple the recipe using the quick-calculation buttons in the recipe card below to figure measurements for you) and once cooked and cooled, store the pancakes in the freezer until ready to reheat and serve!
    • To save even more time in the future, whip up extra dry ingredients, mixed together to make a pancake mix, and store in a sealable container or bag. Then, just add the wet ingredients when it comes time to make! Pro Tip: Print off the recipe card below and tape it to the plastic container for easy reference!
    How do you make buttermilk pancakes?
    Simply substitute regular milk for buttermilk or substitute buttermilk by mixing milk with a few drops of lemon juice.
    What makes a good pancake?
    1. Making sure all of your ingredients are fresh – not expired, especially the baking powder.
    2. Don’t overmix!
    3. Rest the batter for about 5 minutes before cooking.
    How do you cook pancakes in a skillet?
    Yes! I prefer an electric griddle because it makes more at one time. However, a skillet can also create an “edge” and allow the pancakes to have a crispier edge and a fluffy center! NOTE: See the image below of pancakes cooked in a skillet compared to the other pancake photos that are cooked on a griddle!) Simply butter a large skillet and cook pancakes over medium-high heat, according to the directions in the recipe card below!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2pancakes | Calories: 281kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 57mg | Sodium: 103mg | Potassium: 486mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 360IU | Calcium: 233mg | Iron: 2.2mg

    The BEST French Toast Recipe

    November 24, 2024

    French toast halves covered in syrup, sitting on a plate next to blueberries.

    The French toast recipe is so easy, tastes like your favorite restaurant version and is made using simple ingredients. There are a few secrets to the best French toast… adding flour to the batter, and the right ratio of sugars.

    Slices of French toast on a platter, covered in syrup and powdered sugar.

    French toast is delicious all year, but what is it about having yummy French toast on a snow day? There’s something so comforting about it, and you might as well make the best recipe there is when the craving hits.

    If hosting, cooking a lot of individual slices can take a while, so I recommend making a French Toast Casserole instead. Or if you’re looking to impress guests, this Stuffed French Toast recipe is very impressive.

    French Toast Recipe Highlights

    • Restaurant Quality – Why is French toast so good at the diner? It’s possibly because they add a little secret ingredient to the batter like I do. This recipe will wow your family, and will surely become a new favorite.
    • Texture and Flavor – With the addition of sugars and vanilla, this sweet French toast isn’t too sweet but it has just the right amount that gives it a lovely flavor. The texture when using Texas toast makes it fluffy, and every bite has the perfect “bounce” that French toast should have.
    • Simple Ingredients – It’s possible that you already have the ingredients on hand for this easy French toast recipe. If not, they can easily be found at most grocery stores, or I’ve also provided substitution ideas below.

    Key Ingredients

    Full list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    Ingredients for French toast on a table.
    • Bread – I believe the type of bread you use can make a world of difference. Texas toast is recommended for this recipe, although regular sliced bread, brioche for brioche French toast, or even French bread will work as well. It’s fun to experiment and use different types of items like donuts, Hawaiian rolls, and cinnamon-raisin bread too. Older bread (or at least bread that isn’t too fresh) works best as it works better for soaking, and not getting a soggy French toast.
    • Eggs – I use 4 eggs to make 8 slices of Texas toast French toast. The size of your eggs can make a difference, requiring less or more. I usually use medium-sized eggs.
    • Vanilla – Pure vanilla extract is recommended. For years when baking and making recipes, I used imitation vanilla because it was cheaper. However, over the years I’ve learned how much better pure vanilla extract is, and it makes such a difference.
    • Sugars – I prefer using white granulated sugar and light brown sugar. They both give this recipe for French toast a touch of sweetness and the brown sugar gives it that golden color and caramelized flavor. Next time, you may also want to try my Brown Sugar French Toast recipe too.
    • Salt – The salt is the perfect touch of contrast to the sweetness. I prefer using kosher salt but you can use table salt.
    • Heavy Cream – This helps spread the egg and allows the eggs to soak in to the bread. Feel free to use whole milk or half-and-half instead if that’s what you have on hand. I’ve even used flavored coffee creamer for a twist.
    • Flour – The secret ingredient in this recipe! What does flour do to French toast? It helps the egg mixture stick to the bread and can give the outside edges a slight crunch, leaving the middle soft and fluffy.

    How to Make Delicious French Toast

    Mix dry ingredients together in small bowl.
    1. Mix together dry ingredients.
    Mix eggs, heavy cream and vanilla together in bowl.
    2. Mix wet ingredients in a separate bowl, big enough to dip bread in later.
    Add dry ingredients to wet ingredients and mix together.
    3. Pour dry ingredients in with wet.
    Coat bread in egg mixture.
    4. Dip bread slices in to batter to saturate both sides.
    French toast cooking in cast iron skillet.
    5. Add butter to skillet and cook each side.
    Cooked French toast pieces stacked on top of one another.
    Remove French toast to a platter.

    Tips for Great French Toast

    • Saturate – Make sure the egg mixtures soaks in to the bread well before cooking.
    • Cook Temperature – Don’t cook with the heat too high or the outside will burn before the centers are cooked. I prefer to cook French toast on medium-low heat.
    • Cooking in Butter – This is optional, and you can use a non-stick spray or if your skillet is non-stick, you may not need to use butter. However, I love cooking in butter because it adds a browned butter flavor to the toast. TIP: If cooking one slice at a time, the butter melted in the pan can burn if the cooking process takes a while. Either cook larger batches at once, to reduce the amount of time the residual butter cooks in pan, or wipe the excess butter out after a few batches.
    • Cut in to Sticks – These can be cut in to sticks and used for dipping, like with my Cinnamon French Toast Sticks recipe.
    Cooked French toast triangles on a platter, sprinkled with powdered sugar.

    French Toast Toppings

    It can be fun to add different variations to your French toast. Here are some of my favorite ideas, which are similar to my favorite pancake toppings:

    • Syrup (maple, storebought, flavored maple syrup, etc.)
    • Powdered Sugar (you can even make a powdered sugar glaze like I do with my blueberry turnovers and cinnamon biscuits recipe)
    • Fruit (blueberries, strawberries, raspberries, etc.)
    • Drizzle (chocolate syrup, caramel ice cream topping, peanut butter or Biscoff drizzle like I use in these Biscoff cupcakes)
    • Whipped Cream (Cool Whip or homemade whipped cream)
    French toast on plate, covered in syrup and powdered sugar, next to blueberries.

    What to Serve with French Toast

    Classic breakfast side dishes like bacon baked in the oven or baked breakfast sausage always go great with a sweeter breakfast dish.

    Storage Instructions

    • Leftovers – Allow leftovers to fully cool and then wrap, or store in an airtight container and place in the refrigerator and enjoy within 3-4 days.
    • To Freeze – Making French toast in advance to freeze to enjoy later with ease is a great idea. Allow toast to cool and store in a freezer-safe bag, or container and enjoy within 3 months. Freezing Tip: I prefer wrapping toast in food-safe wrap and then in a container to prevent it from becoming freezer-burnt.
    • Reheating – Place frozen toast in a toaster or microwave to thaw and reheat quickly.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is the ratio of milk to eggs for French toast?

    The standard ratio is ¼ cup of liquid to 1 egg. So using 4 eggs, and 1 cup of liquid (heavy cream) gives French bread the perfect balance.

    How long should French toast soak?

    This will depend on the thickness of the bread but it should take about a minute on each side for the egg batter to soak in to the bread.

    Why is my French toast soggy?

    It could be because the bread soaked too long in the egg mixture or because the bread used was very fresh. It’s best to use bread that isn’t so soft.

    Similar Recipes You’ll Love:

    • bread pudding in baking dish
      Bread Pudding Recipe: Easy Old Fashioned Recipe (With Video!)
    • Blueberry Pancakes
      Easy Blueberry Pancakes
    • Blueberry waffles on a plate, drenched in syrup.
      Blueberry Waffles Recipe
    • stack of pancakes with syrup
      Easy Fluffy Pancakes from Scratch

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    French toast halves covered in syrup, sitting on a plate next to blueberries.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    French Toast

    This French Toast Recipe is easy to make and is the best because of a secret ingreident, to make it taste like restaurant French toast at home!
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 full slices
    Calories 304kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • Frying pan or griddle

    Ingredients

    • 8 slices Texas toast

    Dry Ingredients

    • 1 teaspoon cinnamon
    • ¼ cup flour
    • 1 Tablespoon white sugar
    • 1 Tablespoon brown sugar
    • ⅛ teaspoon salt I prefer Kosher salt

    Wet Ingredients

    • 4 eggs
    • 1 Tablespoon vanilla extract
    • 1 cup heavy cream
    • butter for cooking if desired

    Instructions

    • In a small bowl, mix together the dry ingredients.
    • In a larger bowl, whisk the eggs and then add the remaining wet ingredients.
    • Next, pour the dry ingredients in to the wet ingredients, and mix together.
    • Place a slice of Texas toast in the egg mixture, flipping, making sure both sides are saturated.
    • In a skillet on the stovetop over low-medium heat (or on a griddle), it's recommended to melt a small amount of butter, and then add the bread to cook. Cook for 3-4 minutes on each side until golden brown.
      TIP: If you cook too hot, the outside will burn before the middle will cook. It's best to cook low and slow.
    • Remove from skillet, and place on a serving platter while you repeat the final pieces of toast. If desired, slice each piece in half, diagonally, to achieve the look pictured here.
    • Serve with syrup, powdered sugar, fruit, or your favorite toppings if desired.

    Video

    Notes

      • Saturate – Make sure the bread soaks in to the egg mixture well before cooking.
      • Cook Temperature – Don’t cook too high or the outside will burn before the centers are cooked. I prefer to cook French toast on medium-low heat.
      • Cooking in Butter – This is optional, and you can use a non-stick spray or if your skillet is non-stick, you may not need to use butter. However, I love cooking in butter because it adds a browned butter flavor to the toast.
      • Storage – Allow to cool off and then place in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. To freeze, allow toast to cool and then place in a freezer-safe container and enjoy for up to 3 months for best results.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2slices | Calories: 304kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 115mg | Sodium: 286mg | Potassium: 68mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 557IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 7mg

    Pie Crust Cookies

    November 22, 2024

    Close up of pie crust cookies on a white plate, sprinkles with cinnamon and sugar.

    Pie crust cookies are just about as easy as they can get when using a refrigerated pie crust. Or, if using a homemade pie crust is more your style, that can easily be done with this fun cookie recipe too!

    These are a great way to also use any leftover pie crust scraps, so don’t throw them away! Roll the scraps back out, get your favorite cookie-cutters and brush with butter and a cinnamon-sugar spice blend, and watch them disappear.

    Cinnamon sugar pie crust cookies cut in to shapes and sitting on a white plate.

    When I was little, my mom would make the most delicious little treats out of her leftover pie crust scraps. As an adult, I’ve found it’s even fun to buy refrigerated pie crusts to do the same thing, for a quick little treat.

    If you’re using a refrigerated pie crust, they usually come 2, to a box. So if making a recipe like this easy egg custard or this lemon pie recipe, that only requires one crust, these pie dough cookies would be a great way to use up the other crust!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Save: No need to toss any leftover pie scraps! Either roll the scraps back out and use a cookie cutter to cut fun shapes or sprinkle the strips with the toppings and bake.
    • Simple Ingredients: Butter, cinnamon, and sugar. That’s all you need to top your pie crust cinnamon cookies with.
    • Fun for Kids: If the kiddos want to have fun in the kitchen, this can be a great activity for them. They get to use cookie cutters, brush on the butter, and sprinkle the sugar and cinnamon on to the cookies.

    Ingredients Needed

    Here’s what you’ll need to make these pie crust sugar cookies recipe:

    Ingredients for pie crust cookies on a white marble kitchen counter.
    • Refrigerated Pie Crust – Or of course, homemade pie crust or scraps.
    • Butter – Salted or unsalted butter will work for this recipe.
    • Cinnamon/Sugar – For even more ease, sometimes you can find a cinnamon-sugar blend at the store. However, you can sprinkle on the cinnamon and sugar separately. (See below for ratios.)

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    How to Make Pie Crust Cookies

    Preheat the oven to 375°F (or the temperature recommended on the pie crust box) and clean the surface where you plan to make the cookies.

    Tip: Sprinkle a little sugar (or the cinnamon/sugar blend) on the surface, to keep the pie crust from sticking to the surface.

    Cookie cutters sitting on top of unbaked pie crust, on cutting board.

    STEP 1. Unroll the pie crust.

    STEP 2. Using cookie cutters, cut out as many shapes as you like, and place them on a baking sheet that’s lined with parchment paper.

    Unbaked pie crust cookies sitting on baking sheet with parchment paper.

    STEP 3. Brush melted butter on to cookies and sprinkle with a cinnamon and sugar mixture.

    STEP 4. Bake in the preheated oven for 7-8 minutes, or until the cookies no longer look “wet.”

    Baked pie crust cookies on white plate, with a hand holding one flower shaped cookie.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Shapes – The cookies don’t have to be in cookie-cutter shapes. Take a knife and cut strips in to the pie crust (almost in the shape of “french fries“) and bake the same way. Or, you can cut the pie crust in to strips and roll them to make them look like a cinnamon roll.
    • Cinnamon Sugar Mixture – If making your own cinnamon-sugar blend, mix together ¼ cup of white granulated sugar and 1 Tablespoon of ground cinnamon. This will result in more than you’ll need for one pie crust, so you can cut down on this or save the remainder for later.
    • More Variations – Feel free to add your favorite toppings to these cookies, or even add jam, or top with a strawberry buttercream, like we did with these sugar cookie sandwiches.

    Recipe FAQs

    What can I do with a broken pie crust?

    Making pie crust cookies is a great way to use a broken pie crust. Cut in to shapes and brush with melted butter and a cinnamon-sugar mixture. Then bake!

    How do you store pie crust cookies?

    Allow the pie crust cookies to cool and then store them in an airtight container and store at room temperature.

    How to use a leftover baked pie crust.

    If you have a baked pie crust, you can make a pie that requires a baked pie crust such as this banana cream pie recipe.

    What to Serve with Pie Crust Cookies

    These are delicious by themselves but they are also fun to serve with a bowl of your favorite ice cream recipe, or with a dessert dip like this pumpkin fluff recipe, Oreo dip or this Christmas cheese ball.

    More Quick Dessert Recipes You’ll Love

    Love easy desserts like this one? Here are my newest, easy dessert recipes:

    • lemon bundt cake on wood stand
      Creamy Lemon Bundt Cake
    • A square of carrot walnut cake.
      Carrot Cake Poke Cake
    • A slice of coconut cheesecake on a wood board.
      Coconut Cheesecake
    • A piece of granny cake on a small plate.
      Granny Cake

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Close up of pie crust cookies on a white plate, sprinkles with cinnamon and sugar.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Pie Crust Cookies

    Pie crust cookies are made with an unbaked pie crust, either storebought or homemade. Just brush on melted butter and sprinkle a little cinnamon and sugar, and bake!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 13 minutes minutes
    Servings 18 cookies
    Calories 62kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • baking sheet

    Ingredients

    • 1 refrigerated pie crust
    • 2 Tablespoons butter melted
    • 3 Tablespoons cinnamon-sugar mixture *See notes

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
    • Unroll refrigerated pie crust on to clean surface. *See notes.
    • Cut out shapes with cookie cutters and place on prepared baking sheet.
    • Brush melted butter on to cookies and sprinkle with the cinnamon sugar mixture.
    • Bake in the preheated oven for 7-8 minutes or until the cookies no longer look "wet."

    Video

    Notes

    * If making your own cinnamon-sugar mixture, combine ¼ cup of white granulated sugar with 1 Tablespoon of ground cinnamon. This will make more than you’ll probably need but you can store for later or even double the pie crust cookies recipe.
    * Sprinkle cinnamon sugar on to surface before cutting the cookies out, so the pie crust doesn’t stick to the surface.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 62kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 3mg | Sodium: 49mg | Potassium: 10mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 39IU | Calcium: 2mg | Iron: 0.2mg

    Easy Sugar Cookie Recipe

    November 22, 2024

    Cut out and baked sugar cookies that hold their shape, sitting on cutting board.

    Easy Sugar Cookie Recipe: These cut-out cookies are amazing for decorating and are by far my favorite cookie recipe for cut-out sugar cookies that hold their shape!

    Baked cut out sugar cookies on wooden cutting board.

    When learning how to decorate sugar cookies, and sharing it with you, so many of you asked for the recipe so this is the recipe that turns out perfect every time!

    The sugar cookies taste amazing, and hold their shape after baking. The best of both worlds, really!

    No time for cookie cutters? Try pressing sugar cookie dough into mini muffin tins!

    Here are some rave reviews on Pinterest of this recipe!

    My favorite sugar cookie recipe so far. No need to chill. Yields about 24 cookies…yum! See review.

    Jossie Linares

    🎄🌟👢😀 success!!! Happy holiday season everyone! See review.

    xymenakp

    I use my Kitchenaid mixer to make these sugar cookies, although it’s not required.

    The best sugar cookie recipe

    How to Make Cut-Out Sugar Cookies

    Heat your oven to 350 degrees F.

    Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating!

    Cream the Butter, Sugar, and Egg

    In your mixer, cream the butter and sugar, and then add in the extract/emulsion and egg!

    Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating!

    Mix In Dry Ingredients…

    In a separate bowl, combine the flour and baking powder, and then slowly add the flour mixture to wet ingredients, until mixed!

    Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating!

    How to Prevent Sugar Cookie Dough From Sticking

    I love using big-white, art paper, to roll my sugar cookies out. It keeps my counter “cleaner,” and I can just roll it up and throw it in the trash when I’m done rolling them out.
    Sprinkle a little flour on the paper, that way the cookie dough doesn’t stick!

    Or, if you don’t have any paper, I simply sprinkle sugar, powdered sugar or flour (however this can make the cookies have more of a “flour” taste) and roll the dough on top of that so it doesn’t stick. I’ll also sprinkle a bit on the dough so it doesn’t stick to the roller!

    Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating!

    How to Roll Out Sugar Cookie Dough

    There are two different ways you can do this.

    Place the dough out on a rolling surface and LIGHTLY sprinkle with flour or powdered sugar, IF necessary, to reduce sticking (too much flour can make the dough crumbly).

    2. OR… roll the dough between wax or parchment paper. Place between two pieces of wax or parchment and then there’s no need to dust the dough with flour.

    Easy Sugar Cookie Recipe. Great for cut out cookies and decorating!!! Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating!

    Knead the dough, and roll out (with a rolling pin) to a ¼ thickness.

    Easy Sugar Cookie Recipe. Great for cut out cookies and decorating!!! Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating!
    Easy Sugar Cookie Recipe. Great for cut out cookies and decorating!!! Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating!

    Once rolled out, cut cookies in to desired shapes!

    No Chill? No Refrigeration?

    So many sugar cookie recipes require the dough to be chilled before cutting out and baking.

    I’ve found that this recipe does NOT need chilled, however… some have stated that they need to and do just to be safe. So it’s completely up to you. If you have time, feel free to chill!

    Easy Sugar Cookie Recipe. Great for cut out cookies and decorating!!! Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating! Sugar cookie recipe image

    Bake in your 350 degree oven for 6-8 minutes!

    Then, after decorating, they can look like this below! Aren’t those adorable little ice cream cookie cutters? Look at the final result of the ice cream sugar cookies for the ice cream party I styled!

    OMG SOOO cute! Ice cream cone sugar cookies! Using fondant instead of icing is so much easier!

    I just love how easy these are to cut out, and especially love how they hold their shape while baking!

    Or if you’re looking for a fun way to use your sugar cookies, you’ll love these sugar cookie sandwiches!

    Raw sugar cookie dough on kitchen counter with shapes cut out of Christmas trees.

    Common Sugar Cookie Questions:

    How long chill sugar cookie dough?

    If you choose to chill your dough, you can chill it in the freezer for 15 minutes or in the refrigerator for 30 minutes.

    Can I Freeze Sugar Cookies?

    Are you just starting out with making sugar cookies, and decorating? A tip I like to share is to make a few batches of these sugar cookies, and then freeze them after baking, until you’re ready to use them. This works GREAT if you’re making cookies for a party, and don’t want to wait to make them on party day!

    How do you get sugar to stick to sugar cookies?

    When it comes to decorating, if you want to decorate with sugar, lightly brush the cookies with a solution of one part light corn syrup to two parts water and before it dries, pour the sugar onto the cookie. Then, gently tap the cookie on its side to remove any excess sugar.

    New Baking Mat Must-Have!

    Friends, since writing this post a couple of years ago, a dear friend has introduced me to a new baking mat that makes a HUGE difference in my baking. No non-stick spray needed, and the bottoms of the cookies turn out BEAUTIFUL!

    This is where you can buy the baking mat!

    Easy Sugar Cookie Recipe. Great for cut out cookies and decorating!!! Best Sugar Cookies for Decorating AND eating!

    If you have an air fryer, I thought it was so fun to see this sugar cookie recipe in the air fryer too!

    Ingredients in US measurements.

    Christmas Cookie Baking Resources

    Love making and creating fun things for Christmas? You’ll also love these DIY gingerbread ornaments that are a holiday staple for gift-giving and making memories.

    Then, if you’d like to dabble in royal icing decorating, then don’t be intimidated. If I can do it, you can do it:

    See the whole post on decorating sugar cookies with royal icing!

    Royal icing decorated Christmas sugar cookies sitting on wooden cutting board.

    More Cookie Recipes

    Try this non-traditional sugar cookie recipe with chocolate chips too!

    • Strawberry cake mix cookies on white plate.
      Strawberry Cake Mix Cookies
    • Cake mix peanut butter cookies stacked.
      Cake Mix Peanut Butter Cookies
    • Bird Nest Cookies on a plate.
      Bird Nest Cookies
    • Stack of Twix cookies on white marble counter.
      Twix Cookies

    Recipe

    Cut out and baked sugar cookies that hold their shape, sitting on cutting board.
    Print Pin
    4.30 from 41 votes

    Easy Sugar Cookie Recipe

    This easy sugar cookie recipe is great for cut-out cookies, and they hold their shape! Plus, adding almond extract makes these the best tasting cookies!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Total Time 28 minutes minutes
    Servings 24 cookies
    Calories 160kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup butter softened
    • 1 cup sugar
    • 1 teaspoon butter vanilla emulsion Can use regular vanilla extract
    • ½ teaspoon almond emulsion Can use regular almond extract
    • 1 egg
    • 2 teaspoon baking powder
    • 3 cups all-purpose flour
    • extra sugar or powdered sugar for rolling If desired

    Instructions

    • Heat oven to 350 degrees
    • Cream the butter and sugar
    • Add in extract and egg
    • In a separate bowl, combine flour and baking powder
    • Slowly add flour mixture to wet ingredients, until mixed
    • Place dough out on rolling surface
    • LIGHTLY sprinkle with flour, IF necessary, to reduce sticking (too much flour can make the dough crumbly)
    • Knead dough, and roll out to a ¼ thickness
    • Cut cookies in to desired shapes
    • Bake for 6-8 minutes

    Notes

    * You may notice that you don’t have to chill the dough for these cookies! Some prefer doing it though, and if you do, you can chill in the freezer for 15 minutes or in the refrigerator for 30 minutes.
    * If you’d like to make the sugar cookies in advance, you can bake them, allow them to cool, and then place in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. I’ve even frozen them for a year and they’ve lasted!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 160kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 27mg | Sodium: 70mg | Potassium: 55mg | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 245IU | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 0.8mg

    Teriyaki Chicken

    November 18, 2024

    Teriyaki chicken on white steamed rice next to broccoli.

    Teriyaki Chicken made at home can be easy and ready in about 30 minutes! Love the chicken you can get in the food court at the mall?

    This recipe is similar to my favorite dish there, and it’s now an easy dinner recipe that the kids love too.

    Chicken teriyaki on rice, next to rice.

    When I made this teriyaki sauce recipe without ginger, to go on these air fryer teriyaki chicken wings, I knew it needed to go on other chicken recipes because it was so good. It’s also delicious on beef recipes like these Ahola burgers and even non-meat dishes like these mixed vegetables.

    Why You’ll Love This Teriyaki Chicken Recipe

    • Quick Recipe – This chicken is so quick and easy, even if you make the homemade teriyaki sauce to go with it. Even faster? Use a store-bought teriyaki sauce.
    • Type of Chicken – Using chicken thighs in this recipe makes such a difference and makes it similar to the restaurant-style teriyaki chicken recipes.
    • Sweet and Salty – The combination of sweet and salty flavors here is delicious. I’ve even carried the sweet and salty flavors in to this teriyaki sloppy joe recipe for a fun spin.

    Key Ingredients

    Here’s what you’ll need to make this simple teriyaki chicken:

    Full list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    Ingredients for teriyaki chicken recipe.
    • Chicken Thighs – I use boneless, skinless, chicken thighs for best results. Chicken breasts can be used but the result will have a different texture.
    • Teriyaki Sauce – I prefer using my own homemade teriyaki sauce but I’m not against a storebought brand and actually like the Sweet Baby Ray’s teriyaki brand.
    • Corn Starch – This is used to thicken the sauce and help it cling to the chicken.
    • Garlic – I like using garlic powder because this is what I usually have on hand but minced garlic is just fine to use instead!
    • Brown Sugar – Feel free to use light or dark brown sugar. I use light, and this is used to make the sweet portion of the “sweet and salty” flavors of the sauce.
    • Soy Sauce – Low sodium soy sauce is typically recommended in recipes so over-salting doesn’t take place. However I’ve found that regular soy sauce works in this recipe great, and it’s the perfect balance of “salty” for a sweet and salty flavor combination.
    • Oil – I like to keep sesame oil on hand and feel it’s the absolute best for this recipe. However, I don’t expect anyone to go out and buy a whole bottle just for this, so using olive oil or avocado oil will work too.

    How to Make This Easy Teriyaki Chicken

    Teriyaki sauce mixture in a glass bowl with whisk, before cooking it.
    1. First, mix together the ingredients for the teriyaki sauce.
    Chicken thigh pieces covered in cornstarch, garlic powder and pepper.
    2. Coat chicken in black pepper, garlic powder and 1 tablespoon corn starch.
    Chicken thigh pieces cooked in oil on stovetop in skillet.
    3. Brown chicken in oil over medium-high heat.
    Cooked chicken thigh pieces cooked in teriyaki sauce.
    4. Cook chicken until done and add in sauce mixture.
    Teriyaki chicken in sauce.

    5. Allow chicken and sauce to cook until thickened and serve over rice if desired.

    Teriyaki Chicken Tips

    • Versatile Recipe – This chicken recipe is great with so many dishes. Serve it alone, with rice, pasta, quinoa, Instant Pot polenta, on a side salad recipe, or even as a pizza topping or in street tacos.
    • Browning the Chicken – When cooking the chicken, spread the raw meat out so it doesn’t overlap, and then turn the heat on. Do not move or turn the chicken until the underside is golden brown.
      I’ve found that if constantly moving the chicken often while trying to cook, it will take longer to get that golden brown color that’s desired, and it’s easily overcooked. Brown on one side, flip, and then brown on the other side until fully cooked.

    Storing Tips

    • Leftovers: Allow the teriyaki chicken to cool before storing in an airtight container. Place in the refrigerator and enjoy within 4-5 days.
    • Freeze: You can freeze teriyaki chicken, once it has cooled off. Freeze in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw in the refrigerator and reheat in the microwave or on the stovetop.

    What to Serve with Teriyaki Chicken

    This chicken and sauce recipe is delicious served with steamed rice, homemade fried rice and a roasted broccoli.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why do you add teriyaki sauce to chicken after it is cooked?

    Some prefer to cook the chicken in the teriyaki sauce so the flavor gets in to the chicken. However cooking chicken without the sauce allows the chicken to brown, instead of “steam,” giving the teriyaki chicken more flavor.

    How do you thicken teriyaki sauce?

    If the teriyaki sauce is too thin, (water content from chicken can cause this) you can thicken your sauce with a mixture of the corn starch and sauce. (1 teaspoon of sauce mixed with 1 teaspoon of corn starch and then added to the sauce over heat, will thicken.)
    Do note: Teriyaki sauce will thicken a bit more when removed from the heat.

    Does this recipe make enough sauce to drizzle over rice?

    If you love a lot of teriyaki sauce with your chicken and rice, it’s best to double the sauce ingredients in this recipe.

    Related Recipes

    Do you love easy chicken recipes like this teriyaki chicken? You’ll also love these favorites:

    • Cooked chicken bites with salt, pepper and browned butter.
      Chicken Bites
    • Marry me chicken pasta in white bowl.
      Marry Me Chicken Pasta
    • Chicken and gravy on top of mashed potatoes on white plates
      Chicken and Gravy
    • doritos chicken casserole on plate
      Doritos Chicken Casserole

    I have a feeling this recipe will end up on your weekly meal plan like it is on ours! Make sure to pin this recipe for later!

    Recipe

    Teriyaki chicken on white steamed rice next to broccoli.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Teriyaki Chicken

    This teriyaki chicken recipe is so easy to make and is so good, just like take-out from your favorite restaurant, and it uses simple ingredients!
    Course Appetizer, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 30 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 372kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1.5 pounds boneless, skinless, chicken thighs 1-3 pounds should work as well.
    • 2 tablespoons oil I prefer sesame oil but olive oil will work.
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder divided (½ teaspoon + ½ teaspoon)
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • 3 tablespoons corn starch divided (1 tablespoon + 2 tablespoons)
    • 1 cup water
    • ¼ cup soy sauce
    • 1 tablespoon honey
    • 5 tablespoons brown sugar
    • green onions, sesame seeds or crushed red pepper optional as garnishes

    Instructions

    Make Teriyaki Sauce

    • Mix teriyaki sauce together in a mixing bowl. Mix together the ¼ cup soy sauce, 1 cup water, ½ teaspoon garlic powder, 1 tablespoon honey, tablespoons brown sugar and 2 tablespoons corn starch. Set aside.

    Cooking the Chicken

    • Cut chicken thighs (and trim any fat) in to one-inch pieces.
    • In a bowl, sprinkle the ¼ teaspoon pepper, ½ teaspoon garlic powder and 1 tablespoon of cornstarch over the raw chicken pieces, and stir to coat.
    • Pour the 2 tablespoons of oil in to a skillet, and add in the seasoned chicken pieces, spreading it out so each piece is touching the skillet, and isn't on top of other pieces.
    • Turn the burner to medium-high heat and fry the chicken pieces for about 3-5 minutes or until the bottoms of the chicken pieces are a golden brown, and then flip to cook for another 2-3 minutes or until the chicken is cooked all the way through. (It should reach an internal temperature of 165°F.)
      Tip: It can be tempting to stir the chicken a lot while it's cooking but leaving the chicken in one spot for a few minutes, can help get the "browning" you're looking for.
    • When the chicken is fully cooked, pour in the teriyaki sauce and cook over medium-high heat until warmed/thickened.
    • Add red pepper flakes if desired, or add ginger to the teriyaki sauce, and sprinkle with green onion or sesame seeds for a garnish, if desired. Serve over rice for a delicous meal.

    Video

    Notes

    If the teriyaki sauce isn’t as thick as you’d like, spoon a teaspoon of sauce in to a small bowl with a teaspoon of corn starch, and stir to combine. Pour in to the teriyaki chicken and stir to combine, and continue cooking until the sauce thickens. Do note that the sauce will continue to thicken after it cools down so be cautious that you don’t over-thicken the sauce.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving (1 chicken thigh) | Calories: 372kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 34g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 162mg | Sodium: 970mg | Potassium: 481mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 42IU | Vitamin C: 0.04mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 2mg

    Smoked Chicken Tenders – 3 Ways!

    November 17, 2024

    Smoked chicken tenders on parchment paper and baking sheet.

    Smoked Chicken Tenders: 1 way to cook, 3 ways to season! You choose which rub to use and let the smoker be the hero of flavor!

    Smoked Chicken Tenders Recipe

    When you can cook something SO easy, like chicken on a smoker… mixing up the seasonings can add variety to your meal planner even when you’re cooking the same things over and over again.

    I can’t wait to share with you our favorite ways to season chicken tenderloins below.

    • Smoked Candied Bacon
    • Smoked Burgers
    • Air Fryer Buffalo Chicken Tenders
    • Low Carb Parmesan Chicken Tenders
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    All types of chicken can be made on the smoker: breasts, legs, wings, thighs, and even whole chickens. But even after trying almost all of these, chicken tenders may just be my absolute favorite. For a few reasons…

    Chicken tenders cook much faster, they’re juicy (when cooked on the smoker) and they’re easy to wrap bacon around!

    Three Favorite Ways to Season

    There are MANY different ways that you can season chicken and no matter which one we choose that day, a “must” for us is to start by wrapping bacon around each piece of chicken. And if you have time, letting your chicken sit in this amazing chicken brine is an extra bonus of flavor!

    However, when it comes to the “rub” or “seasoning” we’ve found that we have 3 different favorite ways…

    • With Strawberry’s BBQ Seasoning
      (We fell in love with this a long time ago and use it on SO much. It’s hard to find in the store but you can find it online, and I doubt you’ll regret it.)
    • Brown Sugar Garlic Rub – it’s hard to go wrong with brown sugar and garlic on chicken that’s wrapped in bacon. It uses easy ingredients that are typically “on-hand” and it’s a crowd favorite.
      You can find this recipe option in the recipe card below
    • The “Braxton” Rub – this is the homemade rub that we always use on the beef tenderloin recipe but we like using it on chicken too!
      You’ll see that this is the spice rub that we used in the photos and recipe card below!

    No matter which seasoning or “rub” that you choose to use on the chicken, the cook temperature and time will remain the same for this recipe.

    Recipe FAQs

    How long does it take to smoke chicken at 225°?

    Chicken cooked at 225° needs to be cooked at least 1 hour and possibly 1.5 hours, or until it reached the internal temperature of 165°.

    How do you smoke chicken without drying it out?

    Cooking it on “low” (for example, at 225°) and “slow” will help keep your chicken moist. But also wrapping it in bacon helps and also adds an amazing flavor.

    What is the best wood for smoking chicken?

    Hickory pellets (or wood) works amazing for chicken but feel free to use a different flavor if that’s what you have on hand.

    How to Make Smoked Chicken Tenders

    If smoking meat isn’t something you’re familiar with, no worries because this is one of the easiest recipes!

    Smoker Temperature

    Preheat the smoker to 225°.

    Spice Blend

    Mix together a spice blend of your choice. (You’ll see the three recipes or seasonings you can use below for a guide if you prefer.)

    Spice mixture and rub for chicken tenders

    Uncooked Chicken Tenderloins

    To make it easy to season, place the chicken in a single layer on a large dish. I usually buy the 2 pound package of tenderloins for our family of four and do occasionally have a few leftovers to use in a salad recipe the next day.

    uncooked, raw chicken tenders

    Season

    You can season the chicken before wrapping with bacon, after or both. How much will depend on if you’re seasoning only once or both.

    seasoned chicken tenders

    Wrap with Bacon

    If you REALLY like bacon like we do, wrapping one full piece of bacon (we really like the “thick-cut” but “regular cut” bacon holds better) around each chicken tender is delicious. However, if you don’t have enough or want just a small piece of bacon on each piece, it can be cut in half.

    Wrap the chicken with bacon, and if needed, secure with a toothpick.

    wrap chicken tenders in bacon

    If you choose to season again, this is the time to season.

    Note: Seasoning too much can actually happen, especially if using a salty blend.

    Smoked Chicken Tenders Seasoned

    Smoke at 225° for One Hour until Internal Temp is 165°

    Place tenders on smoker racks, not touching one another, and cook at 225° for 1 to 1.5 hours, or until the internal temperature reaches 165°.

    Pellet Smoker Chicken Tenders

    Serve

    When tenderloins reach 165°, remove from smoker and serve!

    Smoked Chicken Tenderloins

    Dipping Sauces for Chicken

    Although these are flavorful just as they are, and don’t NEED a dipping sauce, sometimes it just sends things over the top! Here are dipping sauce ideas that you can serve with it:

    • ranch or jalapeno ranch dressing
    • honey mustard
    • bbq sauce
    • homemade teriyaki sauce
    • Chick-fil-A sauce
    Smoked Chicken Tenders

    Smoked recipes are some of our favorites around here because when you can “set it” and almost forget it… we can work on the other side dishes and desserts to go along with dinner! If you’re new to smoking meats, I have no doubt that you’ll feel the same way!

    More Cook “Out” Recipes

    “Cookout” recipes don’t actually have to be cooked outside to have the same vibe! These baked pork steaks are an absolute winner and perfect even if you don’t have a grill!

    But if you do want to cook “out”, here are some of our favorite recipes for the grill:

    • Chipotle Ribs
    • Grilled Tenderloin
    • Grilled Deer Steaks

    Side Dishes for Chicken

    With a main dish as easy as this, it makes sense to keep the side dishes just as easy!

    Here are some great side dishes to go with this recipe:

    • Close up of old fashioned sausage gravy poured across biscuits, sitting on a white plate.
      Old Fashioned Sausage Gravy
    • Fiesta Ranch potato wedges on plate next to a small bowl of ranch dressing.
      Fiesta Ranch Baked Potato Wedges
    • Chicken macaroni salad in a bowl.
      The BEST Chicken Macaroni Salad
    • Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad in big bowl, sitting on napkin.
      Chicken Caesar Pasta Salad Recipe

    Did You Make This?
    Snap a pic and hashtag it #Fantabulosity — I love to see your creations on Instagram and Facebook.

    Recipe

    Smoked chicken tenders on parchment paper and baking sheet.
    Print Pin
    5 from 15 votes

    Smoked Chicken Tenders

    Smoked Chicken Tenders with 3 chicken rub seasoning recipe options! Simply season, wrap in bacon and smoke!
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 146kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • smoker

    Ingredients

    • 14 uncooked chicken tenderloins (almost 2 pounds)
    • 12 ounces bacon

    Braxton Rub Spice Blend Option

    • 2 Tablespoons dried thyme
    • 2 Tablespoons dried rosemary
    • 1.5 Tablespoons paprika
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon pepper

    For Brown Sugar Garlic Spice Blend Option

    • ½ cup brown sugar
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon paprika optional
    • 1 teaspoon oregano optional
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper

    Instructions

    • Preheat smoker to 225°
    • Wrap each piece of chicken with one piece of bacon, securing with a toothpick if needed.
    • Season chicken with desired "rub" recipe above. (See notes in blog posts for options)
    • Cook chicken on smoker at 225° for 1 to 1.5 hours or until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165°.
    • Remove from smoker and serve! (See post for dipping sauce ideas and side dish recipe suggestions!)

    Notes

    See blog post for tips and our 3 favorite ways to season chicken! Plus tips for making these the BEST chicken tenders we’ve ever had!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tenders | Calories: 146kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 75mg | Sodium: 525mg | Potassium: 491mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 969IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 3mg

    Christmas Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball

    November 17, 2024

    Close up of a plated dessert cheese ball covered in crushed candy canes and mini M&Ms that is surrounded by graham crackers

    Christmas Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball: What do you get when you cross cheesecake and chocolate chip cookie dough? An irresistible no bake Christmas dessert that will be the star of all your holiday parties!

    A birdseye photo of a holiday dessert cheese ball plated with graham crackers

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    No bake desserts like this chocolate chip cream cheese dessert ball and our Christmas Tree Cake Dip and No Bake Peppermint Pie, are superstars for holiday entertaining! (Well, and this sugar cookie fudge recipe of course!)

    If you want to make a similar dessert cheese ball but not with a Christmas spin, you’ll love this Chocolate Chip Dessert Cheese Ball.

    Made with cream cheese, butter, brown sugar and chocolate chips, this dessert ball tastes like cheesecake dip mixed with chocolate chip cookie dough and I’m pretty sure there isn’t a more delicious combination.

    With a few simple ingredients and no fancy equipment, this is a no fail recipe for a holiday get together, baby shower or Christmas dessert party!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Trust me when I say this sweet cheese ball comes together in minutes with just a handful of ingredients from the grocery store.

    The ingredients for a holiday cream cheese dessert cheese ball are displayed on a white marble background
    • 8 ounces of cream cheese, brought to room temperature
    • ½ cup unsalted butter
    • ½ teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • 1 tablespoon light brown sugar
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • ½ cup mini chocolate chips
    • ½ cup holiday mini M&Ms
    • ½ cup crushed candy canes

    See the printable recipe card below for detailed instructions, nutrition information and recipe notes.

    Instructions

    This no bake holiday dessert couldn’t be easier. Just mix, chill, roll and serve!

    1. In a large mixing bowl, cream together cream cheese, butter, vanilla extract and brown sugar using a hand mixer until the mixture is well combined.
    A block of cream cheese, a stick of butter and vanilla are in a glass bowl ready to be mixed with a hand mixer
    Add ingredients to bowl
    A mixture of cream cheese, butter and vanilla extract has been whipped in a glass bowl
    Cream together
    1. Add the powdered sugar and beat on low, increasing the mixer speed to medium until the mixture is smooth and creamy.
    Powdered sugar has been added to a glass bowl that contains a mixture of cream cheese, butter and vanilla
    Add powdered sugar
    A glass bowl is filled with a creamy mixture of cream cheese, butter, vanilla and powdered sugar
    Mix until smooth & creamy
    1. Using a spatula or wooden spoon, fold the mini chocolate chips into the cream cheese base.
    2. Line your countertop with a large piece of plastic wrap. Form the cream cheese mixture into a ball and wrap it tightly in plastic wrap. Refrigerate for at least two hours or overnight.
    Mini chocolate chips have been added to a glass bowl filled with a sweet cream cheese mixture
    Add mini chocolate chips
    A sweet dessert cheese ball has been wrapped in plastic wrap in preparation to be chilled in the refrigerator
    Roll the cheeseball in plastic wrap
    1. Combine the holiday mini M&Ms and crushed candy canes in a bowl or shallow dish. Roll the cheeseball in the decorative mixture.
    A sweet cream cheese dessert cheese ball has been coated in crushed candy canes and mini holiday M&Ms
    Roll the chocolate chip cheeseball in candies
    1. Serve the sweet dessert cheese ball on a platter with graham crackers.
    Close up photo of a Christmas dessert cheese ball showing the coating of crushed candy canes and mini holiday M&Ms

    Substitutions & Variations

    Savory cheese balls shouldn’t steal the holiday spotlight. Here are a few more fun ways to jazz up this dessert cheese ball recipe:

    • Rock and roll it! Feel free to use your favorite festive sprinkles, jimmies or holiday candies to coat this chocolate chip cheese ball.
    • Stir it in! Miniature chocolate chips are a classic add in, but you can stir in toffee bits, toasted chopped pecans, shredded coconut, white chocolate chips or even more candy cane bits.
    • What do you eat a cheese ball with? Switch up your dippers! We used regular graham crackers, but you can use mini vanilla wafers, chocolate graham crackers, Teddy Grahams, chocolate chip cookies, sugar wafer cookies, pretzels, Ritz crackers or even apple slices to dip in this chocolate chip cream cheese ball.
    • Make minis! You can roll the cream cheese mixture into bite-sized dessert cheese balls and chill them before rolling them in the M&Ms and candy canes. Put a pretzel stick or graham cracker sticks into each of the mini cheese balls for easy serving at a holiday party.
    A birdseye photo of a holiday dessert cheese ball surrounded by small plates filled with graham crackers that have been spead with the sweet treat

    Storage

    Wrap any leftover chocolate chip dessert cheese ball in plastic wrap and then aluminum foil and refrigerate for up to 2 weeks.

    Christmas cheese ball with knife carving in to the ball

    Related Recipes

    If you love cheese balls, then make sure to check out this savory cheeseball recipe!

    But if you’re looking for more sweet desserts to serve during the holidays, this dessert cheese ball would look awesome on this Christmas tray idea, or you should definitely give this Christmas Snack Mix a try! My egg custard recipe is a class, vintage recipe that’s popular during the holidays too!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Close up of a plated dessert cheese ball covered in crushed candy canes and mini M&Ms that is surrounded by graham crackers
    Print Pin
    5 from 8 votes

    Christmas Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball

    Christmas Chocolate Chip Cheese Ball: What do you get when you cross cheesecake and chocolate chip cookie dough? An irresistible no bake Christmas dessert that will be the star of all your holiday parties!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Chilling Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 387kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces cream cheese room temperature
    • ½ cup unsalted butter
    • ½ teaspoon pure vanilla extract
    • 1 Tablespoon light brown sugar
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • ½ cup mini chocolate chips
    • ½ cup holiday mini M&Ms
    • ½ cup crushed candy canes

    Instructions

    • In a large bowl, cream together the cream cheese, butter, vanilla extract and brown sugar until the mixture is well combined.
    • Add the powdered sugar and beat on low, increasing the mixer speed to medium until the mixture is smooth and creamy.
    • Using a spatula or wooden spoon, fold in the mini chocolate chips.
    • Line your countertop with a generous piece of plastic wrap. Form the cream cheese mixture into a ball and wrap it tightly with plastic wrap. Refrigerate for at least two hours.
    • Combine the holiday mini M&Ms and crushed candy canes in a bowl or shallow dish. Roll the cheeseball in the decorative mixture.
    • Serve the cheesball on a platter with graham crackers.

    Video

    Notes

    • It is important to allow the cream cheese to come to room temperature (about 30-60 minutes) so there are no lumps of cream cheese in the dessert cheese ball.
    • Store any leftovers in the refrigerator for up to two weeks by wrapping the cheeseball first in plastic wrap, then in aluminum foil.
    • You can make these cheeseball ahead of time and store it until you are ready to serve it by double wrapping it in the same way. We recommend rolling the cheeseball in the M&Ms/candy cane mixture just before serving.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 387kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 63mg | Sodium: 108mg | Potassium: 43mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 32g | Vitamin A: 790IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 60mg | Iron: 0.4mg

    Cheeseburger Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls

    November 16, 2024

    Cheeseburger Sliders

    This easy cheeseburger sliders recipe uses Hawaiian buns, and has a trick to make 12 burger sliders, quickly! Have a smoker? You may want to smoked cheeseburger sliders too!

     easy cheeseburger sliders stacked

    Thanks to all of the 5-star reviews on these baked hamburgers, I knew we had to do a mini hamburger version of the classic burger perfect for cooking for a large crowd or even for fun family dinner recipes or easy lunch!

    Perfect for game day or any party idea, as an appetizer recipe, these cheeseburger sliders are a crowd favorite, along with this cheeseburger casserole!

    Serve them with air-fried sweet potato fries or seasoned potato wedges or even other finger foods like slow cooker BBQ meatballs or these sloppy joe sliders!

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe:

    • There’s a TRICK! Instead of making a ton of little bitty burgers to try and build 12 little cheeseburger sliders… you bake the ground beef in a rectangle, the size of the rolls, so then you can place it on the rolls and cut later just before serving! See how to, below!
    • 30 Minutes or Less: This recipe is a 30-minute or less dinner idea that we love adding to the busy night dinner rotation. (They’re almost as fast as our cheeseburger subs!)

    Ingredients Needed

    Here are a few notes about some of the key ingredients for these cheeseburger sliders. Make sure to visit the recipe card below for the full list of ingredients and instructions to make this recipe a success.

    Ingredients for burger sliders
    • Ground Beef – we only use 1 pound of ground beef to achieve the look you see in the sliders. However, some readers have said that they prefer to use 2 pounds for thicker burgers. (This is a good idea if you’re using fatty beef that tends to shrink quite a bit during cooking.) See more of our favorite ground beef recipes you can make for dinner!
    • Butter – salted or unsalted! (Just be mindful if using salted, that the added salt will combine with the saltiness of the seasoned salt and the garlic salt that’s also in the recipe.)
    • Hawaiian Sweet Rolls – the sweetness of these rolls goes perfectly with the savory flavors of the burger!

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    Hawaiian Roll Sliders

    What makes this recipe so great is the bread you use. It’s hard to go wrong with King’s Hawaiian Sweet Rolls (or similar) for cheeseburger slider recipes and I knew this should be the first choice for the baked hamburger sliders! (We even used these on the Breakfast Sliders and those are delicious too!)

    Plus, the amount of rolls that come in a pack are perfect when using 1-2 pounds of ground beef. However, feel free to use another brand of slider buns or slider buns if desired or if that’s what you have on hand for these mini cheeseburgers.

    The bit of sweetness the rolls add to the savory flavor of the meat is hard to beat, much like these roast beef sliders! (If you love salty mixed with sweet, make sure to also try these donut burgers or waffle burgers the next time the craving hits!)

    Kings Haiwiaan Rolls for Sliders

    Substitutions & Variations

    Feel free to change things up with this cheeseburger sliders recipe, using the products and ingredients that you prefer!

    • Cheese – We love American cheese slices but you can use other melty cheese such as Swiss, pepper jack, Colby-jack, etc.
    • Rolls – If using different rolls that are not connected like the King’s Hawaiian rolls, you can still make this recipe! Bake the ground beef as described above, and slice/cut ground beef in to squares that match the size of the rolls you are using. (Note: the amount of sliders you end up with can vary if your rolls are bigger than the rolls we use in this recipe.) Or, use dinner rolls like we used in this fried chicken sliders recipe if you’re not a fan of the sweetness.
    • Sesame Seeds – If you prefer sesame seeds on your cheeseburger sliders, you can sprinkle those on after brushing on butter and before toasting the buns!
    • Ground Beef Mix-ins – When making regular burgers, do you love using more ingredients, such as Worcestershire sauce, garlic salt or garlic powder, or brown sugar? Feel free to with this recipe! It’s very versatile and can be changed according to your taste!

    How to Make Cheeseburger Sliders

    hawaiian rolls - parchment paper
    1. Preheat your oven to 375° F.
    2. Take the white tray of buns out of bag (if using King’s Hawaiian Rolls).
    3. Using parchment paper, unroll enough paper to make it the size of the tray that the rolls come in. Cut the parchment paper to the size of the tray of rolls.
    4. Cut the parchment paper to an inch or so larger, than the size of the tray of rolls.
    1. Set the tray of rolls aside and place raw ground beef on parchment paper and flatten to the size of the parchment paper.

      This will make the ground beef a rectangular shape that will fit on the buns nicely, when it is spread close to the sides of the parchment paper. (See image below.)
    raw ground beef shaped on parchment paper

    Pro Tip:

    Ground beef can “shrink” when cooking so if desired, you can spread/flatten it out a little over the edges to help it fit the buns, even if it shrinks!)You’re using the parchment paper as a guide to know what size to flatten the ground beef to, so it can fit nicely on the rolls after cooking.

    If you prefer a thicker burger patty, you may want to use 2 pounds of ground beef, just know that it may have a longer bake time than instructed in the recipe card.

    1. Season ground beef with seasoned salt and pepper. (Amounts are given in the recipe card, or you can use your desired amount!)
    season burger sliders with seasoned salt and pepper
    1. Now place parchment paper and ground beef rectangle into a rimmed baking sheet or cake pan.

    How Long to Bake Cheeseburger Sliders

    1. Bake at 375° F for 15-17  minutes or until juices run clear on the top.
    Raw ground beef in baking pan with sides
    1. While the ground beef is baking, this is a great time to make the garlic butter and prep your rolls.
    melted butter and garlic salt to mix
    1. In a small microwavable dish, melt butter and then add in garlic salt. Stir to combine, and set aside.
    2. TIP: Using a bread knife (or serrated knife), and keeping the rolls connected… cut the rolls in half, long ways, creating a giant top layer and bottom buns layer.
      This way you can easily place the rectangle ground beef layer, once fully cooked, on top of the bottom full layer of buns. (No need to try and build 12 individual patties or individual cheeseburger sliders when it can all be done in one step.)
    cut entire block of rolls in half
    1. Once the ground beef has finished baking (and the juices are running clear) remove the pan from the oven. 
    cooked burger for sliders
    1. Carefully, with a large spatula, pick up beef and tilt to drain excess grease back in to the pan.
    2. Then, place bottom halves of rolls, upside down on top of beef, and flip and transfer burgers to a clean baking sheet. This will result in the ground beef and bottom layer or rolls on the new baking sheet with the parchment paper facing up. (See images below.)
    3. Remove the parchment paper and throw it away.
    Remove parchment paper from ground beef square
    Remove parchment paper from the ground beef
    1. Place 6 slices of cheese on top of ground beef. (We use American but you can use your favorite kind).
    parchment paper removed from burgers
    Cooked ground beef on rolls
    Sliced american cheese on top of burgers
    1. Then, place the top buns layer on top of the cheese. (See image below.)
    Place Hawaiian roll tops on burger
    Place tops of Hawaiian rolls on ground beef
    1. Using a basting brush, brush the top of the buns with the garlic butter you have prepared. If you do not have a basting brush, carefully drizzle butter on top of buns, trying to lightly cover each slider top.
    Brush garlic cutter on top of rolls
    1. Place baking tray of sliders in a 375° oven, for 3-4 minutes or until cheese has melted and tops are golden brown.
    Baked cheeseburger sliders with garlic butter
    Baked cheeseburger sliders

    Expert Tip:

    Do you love White Castle burgers? We do too. So what we like to do is wrap the cheeseburger sliders in aluminum foil to let them “steam” for a few minutes, after toasting them in the oven. After this, they’re so soft and even better!

    1. Remove from oven (careful, HOT!) and you can now cut the burgers in to sliders by using a pizza cutter (my favorite) or by cutting on the lines with a knife to get your mini burgers!
    burger sliders

    Favorite Slider Toppings

    Although our boys love these sliders “kid-friendly”, with only cheese… there are some GREAT topping ideas that we also love to add to cheeseburger sliders and especially offer when we’re serving a burger bar when hosting!

    • Lettuce – instead of iceberg lettuce, you can use romaine or leaf lettuce or even spinach
    • Bacon – if you’re heating up the oven anyway, you can bake bacon in the oven while you’re at it, and can even bake turkey bacon in the oven if you prefer! Or, if you have an air fryer, you may enjoy cooking air fryer bacon for bacon cheeseburger sliders!
    • Onions – feel free to add on red onions, green onions, white onions or your favorite kind!
    • Condiments – Mustard, ketchup, or any of your favorite sauces are delicious on sliders too! We use hot sauce in our buffalo chicken sliders, so that may be a fun twist.
    • More Ideas – This list of burger topping ideas is FULL of ideas that are popular and it even suggests toppings that you may not have thought of!
    More Burger Topping Ideas

    How to Store Burger Sliders

    If you have leftover little cheeseburgers, you can store them in an airtight container, in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.

    To reheat, you can place them back in the oven for a few minutes at 350°, being careful not to burn the buns before the meat is heated through. You can also use the microwave, air fryer, or toaster oven!

    Cooking for a Crowd?

    Make a double or triple batch of cheeseburger sliders by using multiple baking sheets and packages of rolls. Fit as many slider batches in your oven that will fit! TIP: tap the “2x” or “3x” buttons in the recipe card below to help you easily configure the amount of ingredients you’ll need for a larger batch.

    Or, mix things up and also make these Italian Sliders to serve alongside these burgers!

    What to Serve with Cheeseburger Sliders

    On a busy weeknight or even when hosting a crowd, our favorite is to serve these cheeseburger sliders with are:

    • french fries
    • onion rings
    • loaded tater tots
    • nachos
    • side salad
    • or some of our favorite appetizer recipes!

    Favorite Burger Recipes

    If you love burgers as much as we do, then you’ll also love the other hamburger recipes we have, such as air fryer burgers, smoked burgers, turkey burgers in the oven, stovetop burger recipe, grilled burgers, and blue cheese cheeseburgers!

    Or, for a different kind of burger, these mini salmon burgers are a hit!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    stack of cheeseburger sliders with hawaiian buns
    Print Pin
    4.99 from 106 votes

    The BEST Cheeseburger Sliders

    This easy cheeseburger sliders recipe uses Hawaiian buns, and a trick to make 12 burger sliders, quickly!
    Course Appetizer, Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 17 minutes minutes
    Total Time 22 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 sliders
    Calories 241kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • Rimmed Sheet Pan
    • parchment paper

    Ingredients

    • 12 Hawaiian Rolls 1 package of Kings Hawaiian Rolls
    • 1 pound ground beef or 2 lbs for thicker burgers
    • 1 teaspoon seasoned salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 6 slices American cheese

    Garlic Butter Topping

    • ½ teaspoon garlic salt
    • 2 tablespoons butter

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 375°.
    • Take the white tray of buns out of the bag packaging (if using King's Hawaiian Rolls).
      12 Hawaiian Rolls
    • Using parchment paper, unroll enough paper to make it the size of the tray that the rolls come in. Cut the parchment paper to the size of the tray of rolls.
    • Set the tray of rolls aside and place raw ground beef on parchment paper and flatten to the size of the parchment paper.
      (Tip: Ground beef can "shrink" when cooking so if desired, you can spread/flatten it out a little over the edges to help it fit the buns, even if it shrinks!)
      This will make the ground beef a rectangular shape, when spread close to the sides of the parchment paper.
      NOTE: You're using the parchment paper as a guide to know what size to flatten the ground beef to so it can fit nicely on the rolls after cooking. If you prefer a thicker burger patty, you may want to use 2 lbs of ground beef, just know that it may have a longer bake time than instructed in the recipe card.
      1 pound ground beef
    • Season ground beef with seasoned salt and pepper. (Amounts given in recipe card, or you can use your desired amount!)
      1 teaspoon seasoned salt, ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • Now place parchment paper and ground beef rectangle in to rimmed baking sheet or cake pan.
    • Bake at 375° for 15-17  minutes or until juices run clear on the top.

    Garlic Butter Topping

    • While ground beef is baking, this is a great time to make the garlic butter and prep your rolls.
    • In small microwavable dish, melt butter and then add in garlic salt. Stir to combine, and set aside.
      2 tablespoons butter, ½ teaspoon garlic salt

    Roll Prep

    • Using a bread knife, and keeping the sides of the 12 rolls connected… cut the rolls in half, long ways, creating a giant top layer and bottom bun layer. This way you can easily place the rectangle ground beef layer, once fully cooked, on top of bottom full layer of buns. (No need to try and build 12 individual sliders when it can all be done in one step.)

    Burger Assembly

    • Once the ground beef has finished baking (and juices are running clear) remove the pan from oven. (TIP: You can leave the oven on if you prefer, to toast buns in the next few steps.)
    • Carefully, with a large spatula, pick up beef and tilt to drain excess grease back in to the pan.
    • Then, place bottom layer of rolls, upside down on top of beef, and flip and transfer burgers to a clean baking sheet. This will result in the ground beef and bottom layer or rolls on the new baking sheet with the parchment paper facing up. (See images in blog post for tips!)
    • Remove the parchment paper and throw paper away.
    • Place 6 slices of cheese on top of ground beef. (we use American but you can use your favorite kind).
      6 slices American cheese
    • Then, place the top bun layer on top of the cheese.
    • Using a basting brush, brush the top of the buns with the garlic butter you have prepared.
    • Place the baking tray of assembled sliders in a 375° oven, for 3-4 minutes or until cheese has melted and tops are golden brown.
    • Optional: You can wrap the sliders in aluminum foil after coming out of the oven, so they will "steam" a bit.
    • Remove from oven (careful, HOT!) and you can now cut the burgers in to sliders by using a pizza cutter (my favorite) or by cutting on the lines with a knife.

    Video

    Notes

    This list of burger topping ideas is FULL of ideas that are popular and it even suggests toppings that you may not have thought of!
    How to Store Leftovers: If you have leftover little cheeseburgers, you can store them in an airtight container, in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
    How to Reheat Leftovers: To reheat, you can place them back in the oven for a few minutes at 350°, being careful not to burn the buns before the meat is heated through. You can also use the microwave, air fryer, or toaster oven!
    How to Make a Large Batch of Sliders: Make a double or triple batch of cheeseburger sliders by using multiple baking sheets and packages of rolls. Fit as many slider batches in your oven as will fit! 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 3sliders | Calories: 241kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 592mg | Potassium: 118mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 158IU | Calcium: 118mg | Iron: 1mg

    Peanut Butter Cup Cookies

    November 16, 2024

    Peanut butter cup cookies on wire rack.

    These Peanut Butter Cup Cookies are made using only 2 ingredients and are ready to enjoy in about 15 minutes!

    You’ll love using your favorite refrigerated cookie dough, and Mini Reese’s Cups (or your favorite, similar mini peanut butter cup) in this peanut butter cup cookie recipe.

    Peanut butter cup cookies on a wire cooling rack.

    An easy cookie recipe is always great to keep on hand for those last-minute needs or sweet tooth cravings. These no-bake chocolate oatmeal cookies and cake mix peanut butter cookies are favorites around here for quick cookie needs, and now these Reeses Cup cookies are right up there with them!

    If you love peanut butter desserts, you’ll also enjoy this popular no-bake peanut butter pie recipe too!

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe for Peanut Butter Cup Cookies

    • Ingredients – Not only are there just 2 ingredients, but they should be easy to find at any major grocery store.
    • Quick – Have unexpected guests? Need a quick dessert to take to someone’s party? These can be ready in 15 minutes!
    • Versatile – Use your favorite cookie dough. Whether that’s your favorite cookie dough flavor or your favorite homemade cookie dough.

    Key Ingredients

    Here’s what you’ll need to make this easy cookie recipe:

    Mini peanut butter cups (Reeses) sitting next to Toll House cookie dough in a tub.

    Important Note: The amount of cookies this recipe can make, depends on the amount of cookie dough you plan to purchase or use. The tub of Toll House cookie dough that I use makes about 36 cookies, so make sure you purchase enough peanut butter cups to make the amount of cookies you plan to make.

    • Chocolate Chip Cookie Dough: You can either use the tub like I do, the roll, or make homemade cookie dough. If you really love peanut butter, making your own peanut butter cookie dough is a great option. Or, sugar cookie dough pairs well with the chocolate peanut butter flavors of the candy too.
    • Mini Peanut Butter Cups: I prefer using Reese’s Miniature Cups but you can use your favorite brand or even the regular-size peanut butter cups and chop them up for the center, although do note the appearance of the finished cookie will look different than shown here.

    How to Make Peanut Butter Cup Cookies

    Begin by preheating the oven to the temperature recommended on the package of cookie dough. In my case, it was 350°F.

    Cookie dough in muffin pan.
    Mini Reeses Cup being pushed down in to center of baked cookie.
    1. Spray the cavities of a 12-cavity muffin pan with nonstick cooking spray.
    2. Scoop out about 2 tablespoons of cookie dough, and roll in to a ball, and place in to a cavity of the muffin tin. Repeat 11 more times.

    Tip: You can also use a mini muffin tin. Watch the bake time in case the cook faster.

    1. Place the muffin pan in the preheated oven, and bake for the recommended time listed on the container of the cookie dough. In my case, this was 12-13 minutes or until golden brown.
    2. While the cookies are baking, unwrap 12 mini peanut butter cups and set aside.
    3. When the cookies have finished baking, place one mini peanut butter cup in to the center of each warm cookie. (You must do this quickly after removing the cookies from the oven, so the peanut butter cup will easily push in.)
    Peanut butter cup stuffed cookies on cooling rack.
    1. Allow the cookies to cool in the muffin tin until they’re warm enough to touch. Using a spoon, gently remove the cookies from the tin (you may need to gently outline the cookie with the spoon to make sure it doesn’t stick to the pan when lifting out) and lift out each cookie and place on a cooling rack.
    Hand holding peanut butter cup cookie, showing the peanut butter cup in the center.

    Recipe Tips

    • Plan ahead: Make sure to unwrap the peanut butter cups ahead of time so the cookies don’t cool off before you can get them inserted.
    • Christmas Cookie: These would be amazing for a Christmas cookie exchange with these other Christmas cookie recipes!
    • Spray Generously: Make sure to spray the muffin tin, generously before baking, so the cookie cups will be easy to lift out, without breaking them.

    Storing Tips

    • Leftovers: Store baked peanut butter cup cookies in a sealable plastic bag or in container and enjoy within 4-5 days.
    • Freeze: Freeze the unbaked cookie dough according to package directions. You can also freeze the finished cookie recipe once they’ve cooled off. Place in a freezer bag or freezer-safe container for up to 3 months.

    Recipe FAQs

    Why do my cookies fall apart after baking?

    They possibly baked too long. Try baking for a shorter amount of time, just until the tops of the cookies look as if they’re turning a slightly, golden brown.

    What size muffin tin do you use for peanut butter cup cookies?

    A regular-size muffin tin or mini-muffin tin can be used. The difference between the two will be more cookie on the sides, giving a better cookie-to-candy ratio in a bite when using a regular muffin tin. Where the mini-muffin tin will have more cookie at the bottom instead of surrounding the chocolate candy.

    Can you add chocolate candy to cookies?

    Absolutely. Chocolate candy bars can be chopped up and inserted in to the center instead of Reese’s if desired, such as Snickers, Twix, or your favorite.

    Related Recipes

    • Close up of chocolate peanut butter brownies
      Peanut Butter Chocolate Brownies Recipe
    • Pineapple Sunshine Cake
      Pineapple Sunshine Cake
    • Bisquick Peach Cobbler serving on a. plate, with ice cream on top.
      Bisquick Peach Cobbler
    • Slice of turtle pie on white plate.
      Turtle Pie

    It’s simple to make this 2-ingredient cookie recipe! Pin this recipe to save it!

    Recipe

    Peanut butter cup cookies on wire rack.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Peanut Butter Cup Cookies

    Using only 2 ingredients for these peanut butter cup cookies; refrigerated store-bought cookie dough, and mini peanut butter cups, this easy cookie recipe is ready in minutes.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 3 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 36 cookie cups
    Calories 160kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • oven
    • muffin tin

    Ingredients

    Cookie Ingredients:

    • 36 ounces refrigerated cookie dough for baking
    • 36 mini peanut butter cups such as Reese's

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350° F or to the temperature in the directions on the cookie dough container.
    • Grease a regular sized muffin tin, generously.
    • Scoop about 2 tablespoons of cookie dough, and roll it in to a ball using your hands, and place the ball of dough in to one of the cavities of the muffin tin. Repeat 11 more times until each cavity is filled.
      (If making more than 12, you may need to refill the muffin tin after the first batch is done. Don't forget to re-spray the pan, and allow the pan to cool before reusing.)
    • Bake in preheated oven for the time as instructed on the cookie dough container. In my case it was 12-13 minutes.
    • While baking, unwrap chocoalte peanut butter candies so they're ready to insert in to the cookies as soon as you remove them from the oven.
    • When cookies are lightly golden brown at the top, remove them from the oven and immediately insert one mini peanut butter cup in to the center of each cookie.
    • Allow the cookies to cool in the muffin pan for a few minutes or until they're cool enough to the touch.
    • Using a spoon, gently run it around the rim of each cookie, making sure the cookie will detach from the pan easily and lift out and place on a cooling rack. Enjoy.

    Notes

    You do not have to make the full tub of cookies. I usually only make 12 at a time for a quick dessert for my family but use the entire tub when making them for a large group or for a cookie exchange.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookie cup with whipped cream | Calories: 160kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 107mg | Potassium: 66mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 14IU | Vitamin C: 0.02mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 1mg

    Crockpot Orange Chicken

    November 16, 2024

    Crockpot orange chicken with diced green onion on steamed rice.

    This crockpot orange chicken takes only 5 ingredients and can be ready in as little as two hours! Serve it over steamed or fried rice for an easy dinner recipe.

    You’ll love the tenderness of the chicken combined with this sweet and tangy orange sauce.

    Crockpot orange chicken on a bed of rice, with diced green onions.

    Orange chicken is a popular dish that can be found at many Americanized Chinese restaurants and now this similar dish can be made at home in your slow cooker.

    Juicy chicken pieces simmered in a sweet and tangy orange sauce, with hints of garlic and ginger for added depth. This easy, one-pot dish delivers a flavorful, citrusy twist on a classic, perfect for a quick weeknight dinner or over a bed of rice.

    This homemade orange chicken will become a weekly staple if you love crockpot recipes! If you have an Instant Pot, you can also try my Instant Pot Orange Chicken next!

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe for Orange Chicken

    • Copycat Flavors – If you have the craving for your favorite orange chicken from a restaurant, then you’ll love how easy it is to make copycat flavors at home.
    • Easy Dinner Recipe – It’s as simple as combine all of the ingredients in to the slow cooker and turning it on! Stir and serve over steamed rice or your favorite restaurant-style fried rice recipe.
    • Simple Ingredients – The ingredients needed for this recipe can easily be found at most grocery stores, and they’re great to keep in the freezer/refrigerator/pantry for the nights you need an easy recipe.

    Key Ingredients

    Here’s what you’ll need to make this crockpot orange chicken:

    Ingredients for crockpot orange chicken recipe.

    Full list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Boneless, Skinless, Chicken Tenderloins: This recipe calls for tenderloins but that’s because it makes the prep even easier and you’ll just cut the tenderloins in to 1-inch pieces. Chicken breasts or skinless, boneless, chicken thighs can also be used in place of tenderloins.
    • Barbecue Sauce: Use your favorite BBQ sauce, although, for best results, I’d use an original flavor sauce, unless you prefer a spicier dish.
    • Soy Sauce: Low-sodium soy sauce is recommended for this recipe to keep the salt flavors from getting too high when combined with the salt in barbecue sauce.
    • Orange Marmalade: If you can’t find marmalade, you can also use an orange jelly or jam.

    How to Make Easy Crockpot Orange Chicken

    Sauces mixed together in the crockpot for an easy orange chicken recipe.
    1. Build the sauce. In the basin of your crockpot, use a large spoon to stir together the orange marmalade, bbq sauce, and soy sauce.
    Raw chicken pieces added to crockpot and sauces for orange chicken.
    2. Add the chicken. Add chicken and stir to coat.

    3. Cook. Cook on high for 2 hours or low for 4 hours, or until the chicken reaches 165°F.  Stir well before removing from the crockpot.

    Cooked orange chicken in the crockpot with sauces.

    4. Garnish and serve. Garnish with chopped green onion if desired, and serve warm, ideally over a bed of rice but it can be served as is.

    Can Orange Chicken be Made on the Stovetop?

    Absolutely. There are two ways you can make orange chicken on the stove.

    1. First Method: You can build your sauce in a skillet and then add the chicken. Stir to coat the chicken in the sauce and cook. Flip the pieces and continue cooking until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165°F (10-15 minutes).
    2. Second Method (Crispier): Or, in a mixing bowl, combine all of the ingredients except the chicken, and mix to combine. Next, coat diced chicken in about ¼ cup of cornstarch (optional) in a skillet for a crispier result, and then sear the chicken in a ¼ cup of oil, until fully cooked to an internal temperature of 165°F. Pour sauce over chicken and stir to combine and allow the sauce to heat through, and then serve.
    Crockpot orange chicken on a wooden spoon, with diced green onions.

    Recipe Tips:

    • To use frozen chicken, increase the cook time by an hour. Be aware that the sauce might turn out a bit watery from the chicken thawing. To thicken it, you can remove the chicken after cooking and whisk in 1-2 teaspoons of cornstarch. 
    • Optional Additions: Add fresh or ground ginger for extra freshness. Try ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes for a bit of spice. Sesame oil is a great way to add a little something extra to this dish. Be mindful that a little goes a long way.  Garnish with toasted sesame seeds or “everything bagel” seasoning. 

    Storing Tips

    • Leftovers: You can keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Allow the chicken to cool before storing. The chicken will keep for about 3 days. 
    • To Reheat on the Stove: Place a skillet over medium heat and add the chicken. Heat for 8-10 minutes or until the sauce is bubbly and the chicken reaches 165°F.
      To Reheat in the Microwave: Place your chicken on a microwave-safe plate and heat for 2 minutes or until warmed throughout. Stir well and serve.
    • To Freeze: Make your 5-ingredient crockpot orange chicken ahead of time and have a hearty meal for another day. Cook as directed and allow the chicken to cool. Transfer to a resealable freezer bag or a freezer container and keep in the refrigerator for up to 3 months. Reheat on the stovetop. 

    Recipe FAQs

    Is it okay to put raw chicken in a slow cooker?

    Absolutely! It’s best to make sure that the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165°F before serving.

    What is the orange sauce made of in orange chicken?

    The easy version of orange chicken sauce includes orange marmalade, soy sauce, and barbecue sauce.

    What can I use to thicken the orange chicken sauce?

    If your orange chicken sauce is too thin, you can add 1-2 Tablespoons of cornstarch to the hot orange sauce, and stir.

    What to Serve with Crockpot Orange Chicken:

    Rice or soba noodles go wonderfully with orange chicken. Or, for additional ideas to serve on the side, try some of these:

    • Avocado Wontons
    • side salad on white plate drizzled with ranch
      The BEST Side Salad Recipe
    • Garlic roasted broccoli in square bowl, sitting on linen napkin.
      Garlic Roasted Broccoli
    • Chopped Asian Salad - in a white bowl with mandarin oranges on top
      Asian Chopped Salad

    Related Recipes:

    • Homemade Teriyaki Sauce
    • Asian chicken lettuce wraps - quick weeknight meal Fantabulosity
      Asian Chicken Lettuce Wraps
    • Crockpot Jalapeno Chicken
      Crockpot Jalapeno Chicken
    • Close up of slow cooker Stove Top chicken and stuffing.
      Crockpot Chicken and Stuffing

    It’s simple to make this 5-ingredient crockpot chicken recipe. Pin this recipe to save it!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Crockpot orange chicken with diced green onion on steamed rice.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Crockpot Orange Chicken

    This crockpot orange chicken recipe only uses 5 ingredients and is ready in as little as 2 hours when cooked on high!
    Course Dinner, Main Course
    Cuisine Asian, Chinese
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 531kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 6-8 quart crockpot
    • large serving spoon
    • measuring spoons and cups

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces orange marmalade
    • 1 cup barbecue sauce
    • ¼ cup low sodium soy sauce
    • 2 pounds boneless skinless chicken tenderloins chopped in to 1-inch pieces
    • 2 Tablespoons green onion chopped

    Instructions

    • Build the sauce. In the basin of your crockpot, use a large spoon to stir together the orange marmalade, bbq sauce, and soy sauce.
    • Add the chicken. Add chicken and stir to coat.
    • Cook. Cook on high for 2 hours or low for 4 hours, or until the chicken reaches 165°F.  Stir well before removing from the crockpot.
    • Garnish and serve. Garnish with chopped green onion and serve warm.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 4servings | Calories: 531kcal | Carbohydrates: 68g | Protein: 50g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 1606mg | Potassium: 1090mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 58g | Vitamin A: 293IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 63mg | Iron: 2mg

    Peanut Butter Fudge with Condensed Milk

    November 15, 2024

    squares of peanut butter fudge on white plate

    Peanut Butter Fudge with Condensed Milk: Using only 3 ingredients, this easy fudge recipe is an easy dessert for the holidays or any time of year!

    Quick Overview: Cook this sweet treat on the stove top or use the microwave, and then simply chill for a couple of hours, similar to how we make this cookie dough fudge!

    stack of peanut butter fudge on white plate

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • This easy peanut butter fudge recipe only requires 3 ingredients, all of which you can keep on hand for a last-minute easy dessert!
    • This homemade fudge recipe is delicious any time of year but is the perfect holiday treat during the holiday season for a dessert table or charcuterie board, sitting next to this Biscoff fudge and this peanut brittle recipe!
    • If you’re a peanut butter lover, then you’ll adore this great recipe when that sweet tooth hits! Simply grab a small piece and you’ll be set!
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    Three ingredients, that’s it! That’s all that’s required! But feel free to add the sea salt flakes as well for a nice salty and sweet contrast!

    ingredients for peanut butter fudge on table

    See the full, printable recipe card toward the bottom of this post for full ingredients and instructions all in one place!

    • 14 ounces can of sweetened condensed milk
    • 13 ounces white chocolate
    • ⅔ cup peanut butter
    • sea salt flakes, optional

    Instructions for This 3 Ingredient Fudge

    In just a few simple steps, this old-fashioned peanut butter fudge is ready for the refrigerator to cool! You also have a choice of how to melt the ingredients; either by stove-top or with the microwave. See both instructions below!

    1. Grease or line with parchment paper or wax paper, an 8-inch square baking tin.  Set aside.

    Microwave Method

    If you’d like to melt the ingredients, making microwave peanut butter fudge, here’s how:

    1. Add the condensed milk, white chocolate, and peanut butter to a microwave-safe bowl.  Microwave in 30-second blocks, stirring each time, until the chocolate has melted.

    Stove-Top Method

    If you prefer to melt the ingredients on the stovetop, here’s how to do that:

    1. Create a double boiler by placing a mixing bowl over a saucepan with simmering water, ensuring the bottom of the bowl doesn’t come into contact with the water.  Add the condensed milk, white chocolate, and peanut butter.  Stir until melted, then remove from heat.
    ingredients in bowl for fudge
    Put ingredients in bowl.
    ingredients melted in bowl
    Melted and mixed.
    1. Pour the fudge mixture into the square pan and spread evenly in the bottom of the pan. If desired, sprinkle with the sea salt flakes, and then place in the fridge to set for 2 hours.
    Fudge batter in baking dish
    Pour in baking pan.
    fudge in baking dish
    Spread evenly in pan.
    1. Once the fudge has set, slice with a sharp knife and enjoy!
    hardened fudge on counter
    Hardened fudge.
    fudge sliced in to squares
    Slice into tiny pieces.
    sliced peanut butter fudge on table

    Substitutions

    • We used creamy peanut butter for a creamy texture but you can use crunchy peanut butter if you prefer!
    • This creamy peanut butter fudge is best made with a good quality eating chocolate, but white cooking chocolate (such as white chocoalte chips) can also be used.

    Variations

    • For something different, the creamy fudge could be sprinkled with chopped peanuts before placing in the fridge.
    • Crushed Oreos would also be delicious mixed in, like in my Oreo fudge recipe.
    • You can also add a splash of vanilla extract if you prefer but it’s not necessary!
    plate of peanut butter fudge pieces on plate

    Storage

    If you have leftover fudge, you can store it in an airtight container, a plastic zip top bag or cover with plastic wrap or aluminum foil, and store in the refrigerator for up to 1 week. Then, simply grab a small bite for a delicous treat when you’re ready.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you make condensed milk fudge set?

    Simply chill in the refrigerator for at least 2 hours.

    Why is my condensed milk fudge grainy?

    If you have grainy fudge, this could be because the ingredients were not stored and mixed well before chilling.

    Can you freeze peanut butter fudge?

    Yes! Freeze in an airtight container or plastic, sealable bag for up to 2 months.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love simple no-bake dessert recipes like this delicious fudge, then you’ll also love our no bake cookies, no bake peanut butter pie, and these no bake peanut butter chocolate bars.

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    squares of peanut butter fudge on white plate
    Print Pin
    5 from 25 votes

    Peanut Butter Fudge with Condensed Milk

    Peanut Butter Fudge with Condensed Milk: Using only 3 ingredients, this easy fudge recipe is an easy dessert for the holidays or any time of year!
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 36 pieces
    Calories 119kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 14 ounces can of sweetened condensed milk
    • 13 ounces white chocolate
    • ⅔ cup peanut butter
    • sea salt flakes optional

    Instructions

    • Grease or line with parchment paper an 8 inch square baking tin.  Set aside.

    Stove Top Method

    • If melting with stovetop, place a mixing bowl over a saucepan with simmering water, ensuring the bottom of the bowl doesn’t come into contact with the water.  Add the condensed milk, white chocolate and peanut butter.  Stir until melted, then remove from heat.

    Microwave Method

    • Add the condensed milk, white chocolate and peanut butter to a microwave safe bowl.  Microwave in 30 second blocks, stirring each time, until the chocolate has melted.

    Chill

    • Pour the melted mixture into the prepared pan. If desired, sprinkle with the sea salt flakes, and then place in the fridge to set for 2 hours.
    • Once the fudge has set, slice with a sharp knife and enjoy!

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1piece | Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 6mg | Sodium: 44mg | Potassium: 97mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 33IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 54mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    How to Make Toast in the Oven

    November 14, 2024

    Toast baked in the oven on a plate with a scoop of butter.

    Curious about how to make toast in the oven? Well, it can be done, and in a few different ways. I’m showing you the various methods, so you can pick which way you want to make your oven-baked toast!

    Love a buttered toast? Dry toast? Quick toast? Real butter, or vegetable oil spread? See which type of toast you’d prefer below and how it was baked, with additional details to help you decide how you’ll make your toasted bread.

    Toast slices on plate, with a dollop of butter in the middle of one piece.

    Toast is so versatile and is great as a side to your favorite breakfast sausage or to these country-fried potatoes for a great breakfast. Or, toasted bread is great for your favorite sandwiches, like this tuna salad recipe.

    No matter what your toast is for, baking bread in the oven is easy, especially if cooking a large amount.

    Key Ingredients

    The ingredients needed depend on the cooking method you prefer and what bread will be used. Toast can be made with or without cooking it in butter or spread. See the different methods below.

    Bread slices with stick butter on baking sheet.
    Regular sliced bread and real butter.
    Loaf of bread with butter on a baking sheet.
    Thick, brioche bread & vegetable spread.
    • Bread – Different types of bread can be toasted but the thickness and type can make the bake time, vary. Regular sliced bread, brioche, French, Italian, and sourdough, are all great types to toast.
    • Butter – Storebought stick butter, homemade butter, or buttery spread (vegetable oil spread) can be used to make toast, if desired. Do note that the type of butter can make a difference in the result as well. See the results below.

    Note: You can also butter your toast after it has been toasted.

    How to Make Toast in the Oven

    Depending on the result that you’re looking for, and how your oven cooks, there are different ways that you can make your toast.

    With or Without Butter or Spread

    First, decide if you’d like to toast your bread with or without butter or spread. Toating bread without spreading something on it, will result in a “dry” and crispy toast. With butter, can result in a flavorful, not-as-dry, bite.

    Plain bread slices on a baking sheet ready for baking.
    Butter bread slices on a baking sheet, ready for baking.

    Best Method for Cooking Toast in the Oven

    In my opinion, baking toast (either thick or regular sliced bread) is best baked with salted butter, in the oven, at 425°F for 5 minutes on one side, and then 5 minutes on the other. See the top piece of bread in each of the photos below.

    Toast in the oven made with butter. Broiled and baked.
    • Toasting Bread at 425°F – Bakes the toast more evenly and gives it the golden color.
    • Broiling Bread – Cooks faster but the edges can burn before the rest of the bread has toasted.
    Different types of toast baked in the oven.

    Real Butter or Vegetable Oil Spread

    Real butter makes better toast than vegetable oil spread but it’s still possible to achieve a toast with a spread. So if this is what you have on hand, instead of real butter, it’s ok to use it too.

    When broiling thicker bread, this could result in browner edges before the middle gets toasted, more so than thinner bread.

    Common Questions About Baking Toast

    Do I have to butter toast before baking?

    No. However, buttering the bread before toasting is recommended to give the toast a better flavor. Or, spreading butter on the toast after baking will work too.

    Should I use vegetable oil spread or real butter to make toast?

    Either will work but results are better if using real butter.

    How long do you bake toast in the oven?

    You can bake toast at 425° F or broil the bread to make toast. Baking at 425°F provides a more even golden-brown result but broiling is faster.

    Making Seasoned Toast

    Toast doesn’t just have to be for breakfast. Sprinkle on garlic salt, parmesan cheese, shredded cheese, or a slice of cheese for a savory treat to go with spaghetti bolognese or lasagna soup.

    What to Serve with Toast

    If making toast for breakfast, you’ll enjoy having these breakfast dishes along with your oven-baked toast:

    • Three crepes on a plate filled with a cream cheese filling.
      Cream Cheese Filling For Crepes
    • Ham and cheese croissant bake serving being lifted out of baking dish.
      Ham and Cheese Croissant Bake
    • Candied bacon pieces on rectangular plate, showing syrup and brown sugar sprinkled on top.
      Smoked Candied Bacon
    • Waffle breakfast sandwich on plate.
      Waffle Breakfast Sandwiches

    Recipe

    Toast baked in the oven on a plate with a scoop of butter.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    How to Make Toast in the Oven

    Toast in the oven can be made by baking, broiling, using real butter, or vegetable spread. Here are the different ways and results that can be achieved.
    Course Breakfast, Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 2 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 5 minutes minutes
    Total Time 7 minutes minutes
    Servings 2 slices
    Calories 277kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • oven

    Ingredients

    • 2 slices bread
    • 4 Tablespoons butter or vegetable spread optional

    Instructions

    Baked at 425°F

    • Preferred method: Spread 1 tablespoon of butter on each slice of bread. Place on a baking sheet and bake in a preheated oven for 5 minutes, and then flip, and bake for an additional 5 minutes.

    Broiled

    • If using butter, spread on each side of the slice(s) of bread. Place on a baking sheet and place in to the oven set to "broil" and broil for one minute. Flip and broil for one more minute.

    Notes

    Thickness of bread, type of baking sheet, and choosing whether or not to butter the bread before toasting can make the cook times differ. It’s best to watch the bread to learn your oven’s behavior. 
    See post for different types of bread, using butter or vegetable spread, and different baking method results.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2slices | Calories: 277kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 60mg | Sodium: 312mg | Potassium: 46mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 700IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 1mg

    Chicken and Gravy

    November 14, 2024

    Chicken and gravy on top of mashed potatoes on white plates

    Chicken and Gravy: Tender bites of seasoned chicken are simmered in a rich, savory gravy for a comforting, cozy dish to serve over rice, buttery mashed potatoes, or noodles.

    A white plate holds a serving of mashed potatoes smothered with a rich creamy chicken mixture

    It is the time of year for hearty soups, chunky chilis, and cozy comfort food! As the temperatures cool down, we start adding our favorite recipes for Instant Pot Chicken and Dumplings, this roast recipe with gravy, and this recipe for butter chicken with rice.

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • One pot: This stovetop recipe for chicken in gravy is a simple, one pot dish. Talk about easy. No oven to heat up, no sink full of dishes to wash, and no complicated tools or techniques!
    • Quick recipe: This is a dinner recipe that’s ready in under 30 minutes! That’s perfect for a busy night.
    • Have leftover chicken? While this recipe is made with fresh chicken, our recipe is also a great way to use up any leftover Chicken Bites or Slow Cooker Shredded Chicken. Or, if you have leftover bacon-wrapped chicken thighs, they’d be so good cut up in this recipe too! Or, if you have leftover turkey from Thanksgiving, it’s a great leftover turkey recipe to use!
    • This is pure comfort food! With the familiar additions of cream of chicken soup and onion soup mix, the chicken gravy mix tastes like home. These easy Swedish meatballs are also a similar comfort food that you’re going to love!
    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Ingredients

    With just a handful of ingredients that you may already have in your pantry and fridge, this chicken and gravy over mashed potatoes (or rice) is an easy dinner recipe that the whole family will love!

    Cut up chicken, broth, spices, butter, a can of soup and fresh parsley are displayed on a white marbled background
    • Boneless Chicken Thighs – using thighs for this recipe makes for juicier chicken.
    • Poultry Seasoning – this is such a great spice for chicken dishes that usually contains a blend of sage, thyme, rosemary, marjoram, nutmeg, and onion powder.
    • French Onion Soup Mix – An easy way to give amazing flavor to this dish, is with a packet of these spices that come all together in a packet.
    • All Purpose Flour – this is used to thicken the stock to make the gravy.
    • Cream of Chicken Soup – Such a delicious canned soup that can add so much flavor to a chicken dish.
    • Chicken broth – If you don’t have storebought chicken broth, this homemade chicken broth recipe is an option as well.

    See the printable recipe card below for all of the ingredients, nutrition information, and detailed recipe notes.

    Instructions

    This chicken mashed potatoes and gravy is one of the easiest recipes for dinner! You just need one bowl and one pan, so follow these easy how-to instructions and dinner will be on the table in no time!

    1. First, in a large mixing bowl, season the chicken with salt, pepper, and poultry seasoning. Toss to coat the chicken evenly and set the bowl aside.
    Seasoned pieces of chicken are in a large pan with melted butter
    1. Next, in a large cast iron pan or large frying pan, melt 2 tablespoons of butter over medium-high heat. Add the chicken.
    Bite sized pieces of seasoned cooked chicken are shown in a large pan
    1. Brown the chicken until it is cooked through, about 10 minutes. Remove the chicken from the pan and set it aside.
    Cooked chicken has been removed from a large pan, leaving the browned bits and a thin sauce in the bottom of the pan
    1. Now, in the same pan, add the remaining butter and let it melt over medium heat, scraping the browned bits from the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon or scraper.
    A small amount of flour has been added to a large pan with butter and the seasoning and browned bits left from cooked chicken
    1. Add the flour to the pan and stir it into the butter. Cook for 2 minutes.
    Cooked chicken, cream of chicken condensed soup and french onion soup mix have been added to a large pan of chicken gravy
    1. Whisk in the chicken stock and continue to cook over medium heat until it has thickened a bit.
    2. Now, add the cooked chicken, cream of chicken soup and onion soup mix. Stir and cook over medium heat until bubbly.
    Vibrant green fresh parsley has been sprinkled over a large pan of creamy chicken and gravy
    1. Remove the pan from the heat and stir in the fresh parsley.
    A large blue pan is filled with a creamy chicken gravy, bite sized pieces of cooked chicken and vibrant green parsley

    Serve this rich, hearty chicken gravy over Instant Pot mashed potatoes, brown, wild or white rice, your favorite pasta, cooked stuffing or cooked egg noodles.

    Pro tip: This is a fabulous way to use leftover turkey and stuffing from Thanksgiving dinner!

    A gold fork has speared several pieces of tender chicken and is held over a plate of mashed potatoes smothered in the same creamy chicken

    This is such a cozy, comfort food dish. You may have also heard this dish called smothered chicken because whatever you serve it over is absolutely smothered with this savory, seasoned gravy.

    Substitutions and Variations

    Here are a few substitutions for some of the ingredients so you can use what you may have on hand:

    • Chicken: Use your favorite boneless, skinless cut of chicken. We used thighs, but if you prefer white meat, you can use boneless skinless chicken breasts.
    • Soup: We used cream of chicken soup, but cream of mushroom soup would also complement the onion soup mix. For an even creamier gravy, you can stir in a little heavy cream or add a dollop of sour cream. We use cream of chicken a lot in quick and easy dishes. (We use two cans in this old-fashioned chicken and noodles recipe.)
    • Meat: This versatile easy recipe can be made with turkey, pork chops, or pork tenderloin cut into bite-sized pieces as well.
    • Pre-cooked chicken: If you need an even quicker version, make the gravy and stir in rotisserie chicken or precooked shredded chicken.
    • Prepared gravy: While we love the easy homemade gravy, you can use chicken gravy packets or even jarred chicken gravy to get this on the table even quicker.

    Crock Pot Chicken and Gravy

    Although this recipe is for a quick, stove-top recipe, it’s possible to make this in a slow cooker. Simply place the chicken in the slow cooker. In a small bowl, mix together the remaining ingredients and pour over chicken. Cook on low for 4-6 hours and serve the chicken gravy over mashed potatoes.

    Recipe FAQs

    What is chicken and gravy made of?

    Quite simply, cooked chicken simmered in a rich, seasoned homemade gravy.

    How do you spice up chicken gravy?

    For more depth of flavor, add ½ teaspoon of onion powder and garlic powder to toss with the chicken. To add a little heat, add a pinch of cayenne pepper, smoked paprika or a spicy seasoning blend to toss the chicken. Or, stir your favorite hot sauce into the gravy as it simmers and comes to a bubble.

    What’s the difference between chicken stock and chicken broth?

    Chicken stock is made from bones and tends to be a little thicker. Chicken broth is made from chicken meat and vegetables and is a little thinner. We used chicken stock in this recipe, but you can use chicken broth or even low sodium chicken broth, too. (If you have time, you can make our homemade chicken broth.)

    What to Serve with Chicken Mashed Potatoes and Gravy

    We recommend serving this as chicken with mashed potatoes and gravy, or you could serve over rice or even egg noodles. But here are a few of our favorite side dish suggestions to serve with this too:

    • Check out these tips on how to make green beans taste better.
    • Candied carrots have a little sweetness to complement the savory gravy.
    • A fresh green salad – we think this is the BEST side salad recipe!

    Storage

    Store any leftovers of this chicken with mashed potatoes and gravy (or even just the chicken and gravy, if you skip the potatoes) in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    You can also freeze this dish. Allow it to cool completely, then store it in an airtight freezer-safe container for up to 3 months.

    A birdseye photo of a large blue pan of chicken and gravy and two plated servings of the same meal

    More Easy Chicken Recipes

    Creamy Lemon Chicken Pasta tastes like a restaurant dish, but it is easy to make in your home kitchen. This Doritos Chicken Casserole is a cozy casserole and a total crowd-pleaser. And I don’t you can ever go wrong with a Quick and Easy Chicken Noodle Soup!

    A close up photo of a spoon dipping into a rich brown creamy chicken dish

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chicken and gravy on top of mashed potatoes on white plates
    Print Pin
    5 from 8 votes

    Chicken and Gravy

    Chicken and Gravy: Tender bites of seasoned chicken are simmered in a rich, savory gravy for a comforting, cozy dish to serve over rice, mashed potatoes or noodles.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 25 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 229kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 pounds boneless skinless chicken thighs cut into bite sized pieces
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • 1 teaspoon poultry seasoning
    • 4 Tablespoons butter divided
    • 2 Tablespoons all purpose flour
    • 1 cup chicken stock
    • 10.5 ounces can of cream of chicken soup
    • 1 packet french onion soup mix
    • 2 Tablespoons fresh parsley chopped for garnish
    • mashed potatoes or rice Optional, served under chicken and gravy

    Instructions

    • First, in a large mixing bowl, season the chicken with salt, pepper and poultry seasoning. Toss to coat the chicken evenly and set the bowl aside.
    • Next, in a large cast iron pan or large frying pan, melt 2 tablespoons of butter over medium high heat. Add the chicken.
    • Brown the chicken until it is cooked through, about 10 minutes. Remove the chicken from the pan and set it aside.
    • Now, in the same pan, add the remaining butter and let it melt over medium heat, scraping the browned bits from the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon or scraper.
    • Add the flour to the butter in the pan and stir it into the butter. Cook for 2 minutes.
    • Whisk in the chicken stock and continue to cook over medium heat until it has thickened a bit.
    • Now, add the cooked chicken, cream of chicken soup and onion soup mix. Stir and cook over medium heat until bubbly.
    • Finally, remove the pan from the heat and stir in the fresh parsley.

    Notes

    • We recommended serving this rich creamy gravy with juicy chicken over mashed potatoes, rice, pasta or egg noodles.
    • You can use boneless, skinless chicken breasts and you may need to increase the cooking time slightly.
    • Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
    • To freeze chicken and gravy, allow it to cool completely, then store it in an airtight freezer safe container for up to 3 months.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 229kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 124mg | Sodium: 620mg | Potassium: 348mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 295IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 23mg | Iron: 1mg

    Blueberry Turnovers Recipe

    November 13, 2024

    Blueberry turnovers with a powdered sugar and milk glaze.

    This blueberry turnovers recipe only takes 3 ingredients (plus the optional glaze) and is ready in about 30 minutes!

    It only takes a package of puff pastry, a can of blueberry pie filling, and an egg to make these delicious fruit-filled turnovers. Want the yummy glaze too? It only takes powdered sugar and milk!

    Blueberry turnover made with puff pastry and blueberry pie filling.

    I love easy breakfast ideas like these puff pastry turnovers because they only require a few ingredients and you can easily switch out the type of filling. These Easy Peach Turnovers are a perfect example!

    If you love easy breakfast recipes like this one, then I think you’ll also enjoy these strawberry scones, these Oatmeal Breakfast Cookies, and this Cinnamon Cream Cheese Filling for Crepes.

    Baked blueberry turnovers on a cooling rack.

    Recipe Highlights

    • Only Three Ingredients: These delicious breakfast pastries only require 3 ingredients, and dare I say you could get away with only 2 if you’re out of egg! Puff pastry and canned pie filling are the two must-haves. If you don’t have an egg, you could try pinching the sides together and hope they hold their shape or even use a little touch of water to help seal the sides of the puff pastry together.
    • Versatile: Switch up the filling flavors, drizzle the tops with different toppings, and more! Make these turnovers your favorite or make a variety if hosting a food bar for a party.
    • Make-Ahead: I love how these can be made ahead of time for an easy breakfast on the go if needed!

    Key Ingredients

    Here’s what you’ll need to make these easy turnovers:

    Ingredients for easy turnovers: puff pastry, pie filling and egg.

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Puff Pastry – A package should come with two sheets and this will make 8 turnovers.
    • Pie Filling – Pie filling typically comes in large cans, around 21 ounces. If making 8 turnovers with the two puff pastry sheets, you’ll only use about half of the pie filling. Use the leftover pie filling to make a double batch or make these no-bake mini cheesecakes.
    • Egg – The egg is used to help seal the edges of the puff pastry together and to brush on the outside for that golden brown touch.

    How to Make Easy Blueberry Turnovers

    Begin by preheating the oven to 350° F. and line a baking sheet (large enough to fit 8 turnovers, or two baking sheets holding 4 each) with parchment paper or cooking spray.

    Puff pastry sheet cut in to four pieces.
    1. You’ll start by rolling out the puff pastry dough, pinching the seams together if necessary.
    Blueberry pie filling spooned out on to each puff pastry square.
    2. Add 1 heaping tablespoon of blueberry filling to the center of each square.
    Egg wash brushed on edges of puff pastry.
    3. Brush a small amount of beaten egg on two joining sides of the square to help hold the turnover together.
    Egg wash brushed on outside of puff pastry.
    4. Roll the opposite side over the filling and press down the sides to seal. Using a fork, press along the sides of the pastry and then brush the beaten egg on the tops of the turnovers.

    5. Place the turnovers on to the prepared baking sheet and bake at 350 for 25-30 minutes or until the dough is golden brown.

    Baked blueberry turnovers using puff pastry.

    Powdered Sugar Drizzle Recipe

    Although not required, this delicious powdered sugar drizzle is highly recommended on top of these pastries.

    Mix together about 3 heaping tablespoons of powdered sugar and 1 tablespoon of milk or half-and-half (or heavy cream) to create a glaze. Feel free to add/reduce the amounts to get the consistency you’re looking for.

    Tip: Allow the turnovers to cool before drizzling the glaze or it will soak in to the turnover instead of remaining on top.

    Blueberry turnover with powdered sugar glaze.

    Turnover Recipe Varieties

    If you don’t like blueberry pastries, there are many other options you can try!

    • Apple Pie Filling
    • Cherry Pie Filling
    • Peach Pie Filling
    • Chocolate Pudding
    • Lemon Pudding or Pie Filling
    • Strawberry Jam
    • Blackberry Jam
    • Savory Ingredients: Sausage, ham, eggs, bacon, cheese, rice, leftover taco meat, etc.

    Additional Mix-In Ideas for Turnovers:

    • Pecans/Nuts
    • Cheese
    • Cream Cheese
    • Chocolate Chips
    • Coconut
    • Caramel
    • Peanut Butter

    Turnover Recipe FAQs

    How do you make a turnover?

    Pastry dough is filled with a sweet or savory filling and then the dough is folded over the filling, sealed, and then baked or fried.

    What is the difference between a turnover and a hand pie?

    A turnover is typically made with a pastry dough, like puff pastry, and then it’s folder over a filling. A hand pie typically uses pie dough and can be in a square or circle shape, rather than a half moon or triangle like a turnover.

    Can you fry a turnover instead of baking?

    You can! Frying a turnover in vegetable or canola oil can be an alternative to baking.

    Love blueberry recipes? You’re also going to really love these blueberry muffins! They’re moist, easy to make and a breakfast favorite! Or, this easy blueberry cobbler recipe can be made using blueberries that you have on hand.

    More Breakfast Recipes

    Love making breakfast? I do too. You’ll want to get your hands on these breakfast recipes for your sweet tooth!

    • French Toast Bake
    • Stuffed Strawberry Cream Cheese French Toast
    • Easy French Toast Recipe

    Recipe

    Blueberry turnovers with a powdered sugar and milk glaze.
    Print Pin
    5 from 9 votes

    Easy Blueberry Turnovers

    Blueberry Turnovers – A recipe SO easy using puff pastry and canned blueberry pie filling in the inside, baking to a golden brown.
    Course Breakfast, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Total Time 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 turnovers
    Calories 143kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 package puff pastry dough 2 sheets
    • 11 ounces blueberry pie filling
    • 1 egg beaten

    Powdered Sugar Glaze

    • 3 Tablespoons powdered sugar optional
    • 1 Tablespoon milk or half and half, optional

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F. and prepare a baking
      sheet with nonstick spray and/or parchment paper.
    • Roll out the puff pastry dough and pinch the seams together
      if necessary. Cut into 4 equal squares.
    • Add 1 heaping Tablespoon of blueberry filling to the center of each square.
    • Brush a small amount of beaten egg on two joining sides of the square to help hold the turnover together.
    • Roll the opposite side over the filling and press down the
      sides to seal.
    • Using a fork, press along the sides of the pastry.
    • Place on the prepared baking sheet, brush the tops of the turnovers with the beaten egg, and bake for 25-30 minutes or until the dough is golden brown.
    • Serve warm and enjoy!

    Quick Glaze

    • If you'd like to drizzle a quick icing on the top, simply mix a little powdered sugar and milk together to create the consistency of the glaze that you prefer. Allow the turnovers to cool completely before drizzling if you don't want the glaze to soak in.

    Video

    Notes

    Puff Pastry Temperature: Puff pastry is best handled, cold. It can be harder to handle as it warms from being at room temperature. 
    Pressing Trouble: When pressing with a fork, if you find the fork sticking to the puff pastry, wet your fork in cold water and then press. 
    Storage: It’s best to store any leftover turnovers in the refrigerator and best if enjoyed within 3-4 days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1turnover | Calories: 143kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 17mg | Potassium: 93mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 28g | Vitamin A: 45IU | Vitamin C: 0.5mg | Calcium: 23mg | Iron: 0.7mg

    Chocolate Bread

    November 12, 2024

    Chocolate bread, sliced, showing the inside of the moist loaf.

    This chocolate bread recipe is a quick bread recipe (made without yeast) that can also be called a chocolate loaf cake.

    It’s a delicious dessert that’s easy to make, ready in a little over an hour, and lovely for a fun breakfast, after-dinner dessert or even to package up and gift to friends and family.

    Chocolate bread on platter, with a couple of slices cut.

    Loaf cake recipes are one of my favorite sweet breads. They’re usually really easy to make, use simple ingredients and they can be made in so many different ways.

    Add a little sour cream and buttermilk to this recipe, and you’re heading to a moist bread recipe. The cocoa and chocolate chips added to the bread batter give this loaf cake a delicious amount of chocolate.

    If you love bread recipes like this one, then you will also enjoy my pumpkin bread recipe, this buttermilk banana bread, and this chocolate bread pudding recipe.

    Chocolate Bread Recipe Highlights

    • Easy to Make – Mixing the dry ingredients together, then the wet, and then combine, and bake! Great recipe for beginners or even just if a chocolate craving hits!
    • Moist – Adding buttermilk to a sweet bread recipe is a great way to ensure that it will be a moist slice of cake bread.
    • Simple Ingredients – The ingredients required for this recipe tend to be kitchen staples so you may even already have what you need. If not, the ingredients can easily be found at most grocery stores.

    Key Ingredients

    Here’s what you’ll need to make this easy chocolate loaf.

    Ingredients for making chocolate bread recipe.

    Complete list of ingredients and amounts can be found in the recipe card below.

    • Dry Ingredients: All-purpose flour, unsweetened cocoa powder, brown sugar, chocolate chips, and baking powder.
    • Wet Ingredients: Buttermilk, vanilla, eggs, oil, and sour cream.

    How to Make Chocolate Loaf Bread

    Start by preheating the oven to 350° F. Spray or grease the inside of a loaf pan and set aside. Or, line the loaf pan with parchment paper (cutting the corners so it fits better).

    Cocoa, flour, salt, brown sugar and baking powder in mixing bowl.
    1. In a large bowl, combine flour, cocoa powder, salt, baking powder and brown sugar.
    Eggs, buttermilk, sour cream, and vanilla in a mixing bowl.
    2. In another bowl, whisk together buttermilk, oil, sour cream, eggs and vanilla.
    Wet ingredients poured in to dry ingredients in mixing bowl.
    3. Make a well in the center of the dry ingredients and pour in the wet ingredients. Stir together until about halfway combined.
    Chocolate chips added to chocolate bread batter.
    4. Add chocolate chips and stir until the batter just comes together.
    Chocolate bread batter in a loaf pan, ready for baking.
    5. Pour the chocolate bread batter into the prepared loaf pan.
    Baked chocolate bread in loaf pan.
    6. Bake the loaf for 55 to 70 minutes, until a toothpick inserted into the center, comes out clean.
    Baked chocolate bread out of loaf pan, ready for slicing.

    Recipe Tips:

    • Allow to Rest/Cool: Allow the bread to rest in the loaf pan for a few minutes before removing or slicing. If possible, lift out of loaf pan and allow to cool on a wire rack.
    • Baking Time: Ovens can bake differently, and loaf pan thickness can vary, causing the baking time to differ, so it’s important to check on it the first time making it, so as not to overbake it.
    • Optional Frosting: Feel free to add a chocolate frosting to the top of this loaf cake, if desired. Just be sure to allow it to fully cool before doing so. Or spread this mint buttercream frosting on top.
    Sliced chocolate bread on platter.

    Storing Tips

    Chocolate bread can be stored at room temperature on the counter, in an airtight container, or a storage bag. This should stay fresh for 3-4 days.

    If freezing, allow the chocolate loaf cake to cool completely. Wrap in plastic wrap or Press ‘n Seal, and then in a freezer bag or container for up to 3 months. Allow to thaw at room temperature and enjoy.

    Chocolate Bread Variations

    • Instead of frosting, sprinkle powdered sugar on top for a lighter topping.
    • For Christmas, spread chocolate buttercream on top and sprinkle on crushed peppermint candies like I did in this Christmas Chocolate Cake.
    • Instead of chocolate chips, butterscotch or peanut butter baking chips could be used for a flavor variation.

    Recipe FAQs

    How do you eat chocolate bread?

    When made in to a chocolate loaf, slice in to individual slices and enjoy as is or spread butter on each slice.

    What is the difference between a loaf cake and a regular cake?

    A chocolate loaf cake is made in a loaf pan or bread pan instead of a circular or rectangular pan.

    What type of bread is made without yeast?

    A quick bread, or sweet bread can be made without yeast. Quick breads use baking powder to help the bread rise.

    More Chocolate Dessert Recipes

    • Mini chocolate cake on small cake stand.
      Mini Chocolate Cake
    • Chocolate peanut butter cake, a round, layered cake with toffee bits and salted caramel drizzled on top.
      Chocolate Peanut Butter Cake
    • Ding Dong Cake
    • A slice of Milky Way cake stacked on top of another slice of cake.
      Milky Way Cake

    Have more of the same ingredients? Whip up a second loaf of this chocolate bread recipe and give it to your neighbors!

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Chocolate bread, sliced, showing the inside of the moist loaf.
    Print Pin
    3.50 from 2 votes

    Chocolate Bread

    Chocolate bread is made using simple ingredients and is a sweet, quick bread recipe that's made without yeast. Buttermilk and sour cream help make this moist and delicious.
    Course Breakfast, Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 55 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 slices
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Equipment

    • 1 loaf pan
    • 2 mixing bowls
    • 1 Whisk

    Ingredients

    • 2½ cups all-purpose flour
    • ¾ cup cocoa powder
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 2½ teaspoons baking powder
    • 1½ cups brown sugar
    • 1 cup buttermilk
    • ¾ cup canola oil or vegetable oil
    • ⅓ cup sour cream
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 cup chocolate chips optional

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.
    • Grease a loaf pan and set aside.In a large bowl, combine flour, cocoa powder, salt, baking powder and brown sugar.In another bowl, whisk together buttermilk, oil, sour cream, eggs and vanilla.
    • Make a well in the center of the dry ingredients and pour in the wet ingredients. Stir together until about halfway combined.
    • Add chocolate chips and stir until the batter just comes together.
    • Pour into the prepared loaf pan and bake for 55 to 70 minutes, until a toothpick comes out clean.

    Video

    Notes

    • Allow to Rest/Cool: Allow the bread to rest in the loaf pan for a few minutes before removing or slicing. If possible, lift out of loaf pan and allow to cool on a wire rack.
    • Baking Time: Ovens can bake differently, and loaf pan thickness can vary, causing the baking time to differ, so it’s important to check on it the first time making it, so as not to overbake it.
    • Optional Frosting: Feel free to add a chocolate frosting to the top of this loaf cake, if desired. Just be sure to allow it to fully cool before doing so. Or spread this mint buttercream frosting on top.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice
    • « Go to Previous Page
    • Page 1
    • Page 2
    • Page 3
    • Page 4
    • Page 5
    • Interim pages omitted …
    • Page 23
    • Go to Next Page »

    Primary Sidebar

    Jessica Burgess of Fantabulosity, slicing an avocado.

    Hi, I'm Jessica! - Owner and Creator of the blog and brand, Fantabulosity.

    I’m here to teach you how to make quick and easy recipes, using simple ingredients, that your family will love.

    More about me →

    Summer Recipes

    • Close-up of pinwheel sandwiches stacked on top of one another.
      Pinwheel Sandwiches
    • Chicken macaroni salad in a bowl.
      The BEST Chicken Macaroni Salad
    • Chicken salad with grapes and apples, sitting on bread.
      Chicken Salad with Grapes and Apples
    • Serving of banana pudding on small plate.
      Quick & Easy Banana Pudding

    Popular Recipes

    • bread pudding in baking dish
      Bread Pudding Recipe: Easy Old Fashioned Recipe (With Video!)
    • Burger baked in the oven, steamed in aluminum foil, and placed on white plate.
      Burgers in the Oven
    • Oven Baked Steak with Butter and a side of potatoes
      How to Cook Steak in the Oven
    • Strawberry brownies on white marble cutting board.
      Strawberry Brownies Recipe
    • Cheeseburger Sliders
      Cheeseburger Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls
    • Baked BBQ Pork Steaks on white plate
      Pork Steaks in the Oven

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    Featured In

    About

    • About Jessica
    • Contact
    • Collaborate
    • 5 Days of Delicious Dinners

    Easy Recipes

    • All Recipes
    • Dinner Recipes
    • Side Dishes
    • Desserts

    How to Cook

    • Oven-Baked
    • Stove-Top
    • No Bake
    • Slow Cooker

    Privacy Policy |Accessibility Copyright © 2025 Fantabulosity | Terms & Conditions | FTC

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required